Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
User Manual
Budget Execution
November 2017
Prepared by
VERSION CONTROL
Date
Version Status
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................- 1 -
1.1 Overview of Budget Execution ............................................................................................- 1 -
Budget Execution Modules .............................................................................................- 1 -
1.2 Unified Account Codes Structure ........................................................................................- 3 -
UACS Elements ..............................................................................................................- 3 -
Responsibility Center Code .............................................................................................- 4 -
1.3 Basic Solution Functionalities .............................................................................................- 4 -
For Purchase Transactions .............................................................................................- 4 -
For General Expenditure Items .......................................................................................- 5 -
For Receipts Transactions ..............................................................................................- 5 -
For Disbursements without Obligation ............................................................................- 5 -
For Adjustments and Periodic Functions ........................................................................- 6 -
2 BTMS Forms and User Roles ......................................................................................................- 7 -
2.1 Obligation ............................................................................................................................- 7 -
Screen and Descriptions .................................................................................................- 7 -
Icons and Buttons............................................................................................................- 9 -
User Roles.................................................................................................................... - 10 -
2.2 Purchase Requisition ....................................................................................................... - 12 -
Screen and Descriptions .............................................................................................. - 12 -
Icons and Buttons......................................................................................................... - 15 -
User Roles.................................................................................................................... - 16 -
2.3 Purchase Order ................................................................................................................ - 18 -
Screen and Descriptions .............................................................................................. - 18 -
Icons and Buttons......................................................................................................... - 22 -
User Roles.................................................................................................................... - 22 -
2.4 Goods Received and Return Notes ................................................................................. - 24 -
Screen and Descriptions .............................................................................................. - 24 -
Icons and Buttons......................................................................................................... - 27 -
User Roles.................................................................................................................... - 27 -
2.5 Disbursement Voucher ..................................................................................................... - 29 -
Screen and Descriptions .............................................................................................. - 29 -
Icons and Buttons......................................................................................................... - 32 -
User Roles.................................................................................................................... - 32 -
2.6 Payment Extracts ............................................................................................................. - 35 -
Screen and Descriptions .............................................................................................. - 35 -
Icons and Buttons......................................................................................................... - 37 -
2.7 Payment Extract Payment ................................................................................................ - 38 -
Screen and Descriptions .............................................................................................. - 38 -
Icons and Buttons......................................................................................................... - 40 -
User Roles.................................................................................................................... - 40 -
List of Figures
FIGURE 1. SCOPE OF BTMS SOLUTION ....................................................................................................... - 1 -
FIGURE 2. PROCESSING PURCHASE TRANSACTIONS ....................................................................................... - 4 -
FIGURE 3. PROCESSING GOVERNMENT EXPENDITIURES .................................................................................. - 5 -
FIGURE 4. PROCESSING COLLECTIONS AND OTHER RECEIPTS ........................................................................... - 5 -
FIGURE 5. PROCESSING STANDALONE DISBURSEMENTS ................................................................................. - 6 -
FIGURE 6. USER DASHBOARD .................................................................................................................. - 65 -
Table of Acronyms
ADA Advice to Debit Account (as payment method)
AGSB Authorized Government Servicing Bank
APP Annual Procurement Plan
APR Agency Purchase Request
BAC Bids and Awards Committee
BCUV Budget Control Update Voucher
BSO Bureau, Service and Office
BTMS Budget and Treasury Management
BTr Bureau of the Treasury
CA Cash advance
CAF Certificate of Availability of Funds
CAN Collective Negotiation Agreement
CG Cash Gift
CHQ Check (as payment method)
CO Capital Outlay
COA Commission on Audit
DBM Department of Budget and Management
DOF Department of Finance
DV Disbursement Voucher
ECIP Employees' Compensation Insurance Premium
ESIAS Employees Suggestions and Incentive Awards System
FMS Financial Management Service
GAM Government Accounting Manual
GRN Goods Received Note
GRP Government Resource Planning
GSD General Services Division
GSIS Government Service Insurance System
HDMF Housing Development and Mutual Fund
HRD Human Resource Division
ICT Information and Communication Technology
ID Identification
JEV Journal Entry Voucher
LR Liquidation Report
MFO Major Final Output
MOOE Maintenance and Other Operating Expenses
NCA Notice of Cash Allocation
NGA National Government Agency
NSO National Statistics Office
NTA Notice of Transfer of Allocation
ObR Obligation Request
PAP Program, activities and projects
PCF Petty Cash Fund
PERA Personnel Economic Relief Allowance
PHIC Philippine Health Insurance Corporation
PhilGEPS Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System
The budget execution covers the following public financial management functions:
Commitments and Obligations Management
Payments Management
Receipts Management
Property, Plant and Equipment
Accounting and Fiscal Reporting
Purchase Request (PR). The Obligation Request (ObR) can also be created manually, linked
to a pre-created Commitment, or automatically when a Purchase Order (PO) is prepared and
approved. The system enforces budget control where commitments or obligations exceeding
allotments are not allowed. These public financial management functions are performed by
the requesting unit or office and the Budget unit or division. Systems and customized reports
according to government-prescribed format are available in this module.
The processes involved in the settlement of liabilities or payment of approved DVs are an
integral part of the Payments Management module. Payment forms are created through the
system, from determining due and demandable transactions through Payment Extracts up to
finalizing fund transfers. It also performs the daily bank reconciliation automatically using an
interface with the electronic bank statements. These functions are performed by the Cash unit
or division or the Administrative Service, and the Head of the Agency. Systems and
customized reports according to government-prescribed format are available in this module.
UACS Elements
The UACS Coding Block is the language used to record financial transactions in the system.
This multi-dimensional code has five key elements:
Object Codes
The 10-digit Object Code in UACS is based on the Revised Chart of Accounts for
National Government Agencies, of the Commission on Audit as adopted under COA
Circular No. 2013-002 dated January 30, 2013, and COA Circular No. 2014-003 dated
April 15, 2014 and also includes the 2-digit sub-object code.
The approval of PR would automatically create the approved commitment to set aside funds
for that intended purchase. The approved amount of commitment sets the maximum amount
of the subsequent actual purchase. This control is compliant to procurement guidelines that
require actual purchase or PO to be less than or equal to (but not more than) the approved
commitment or budget for contracts. Similarly, the approval of PO would automatically create
the approved ObR.
Once the inspection and acceptance report is approved, through the creation and approval of
GRN (otherwise, the Goods Returned Note), then the payment would be processed by
creating the DV.
There are also non-cash transactions that must be recorded into the system through
preparation of JEV. Common transactions using this functionality are liquidations of cash
advances, periodic adjustments like depreciation, receipt of Notice of Cash Allocation (NCA)
or Notice of Transfer of Allocation (NTA), and capitalization of Construction in Progress (CIP).
All expenditures of the GOP require an obligation. However, there are other types of expenses
that are not incurred through purchasing. These include: salaries and wages, travel expenses,
employee compensation, allowances, training, leave benefits, and overtime pay.
Navigation
Menu ► Budget Management ► Obligation
o Status: This field indicates if the Obligation is open and can be spent, or closed. The
Default value is “Open”. When an Obligation is fully spent (i.e. remaining balance
equals zero) then the status should automatically show as “Closed”. The user can also
close an obligation manually if there is no more need for the obligation. If the obligation
has been closed, transactions relating to that Obligation cannot be posted and the
obligation cannot be used for transaction.
o Commitment: The source Commitment ID referred to when the Obligation is linked to
a Commitment.
o Description: A Brief description of the Obligation. This is a mandatory field.
o Amount Original (Domestic): This is a ‘Display-only field’, automatically updated by
the system. This indicates the original Obligation amount in domestic currency.
o Amount (Domestic): This is a Display-only field, automatically populated by the
system. This shows the total domestic amount of the Obligation; automatically
calculated by the system.
o Current Amount (Domestic): This is a Display-only field. It is calculated from
domestic amounts that are finally used. After the obligation item is closed, this will
show the value that is finally used, in case the total obligated amount is not fully used.
o YTD Actual (Domestic): Total domestic currency year-to-date actual expense amount
of the Obligation will be shown here. This is automatically calculated.
o Balance (Domestic): The total domestic amount balance of the Obligation;
automatically calculated.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Audit/Import
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
In BTMS, the ObR form shall be prepared by the authorized user from the Requesting Unit or
Originating Office when they request for the utilization of their approved budget allocations.
The assigned Creator will create the request and send it to the Unit Head for review and
approval.
Role No. 1: Creator
The authorized officer from the requesting BSO will create ObR in the system and
submit it to their head of office for review and approval. He/she shall complete the
information including primarily the Payee or Vendor/Supplier, UACS Coding Block,
amount of obligation, etc.
Role No. 2: First-line Approver
The Head of the requesting unit will review and approve the ObR and forward it to
the authorized reviewer from the Budget division for review and certification. He/she
has the option to send “Back to Creator” when upon review the document requires
modification, updating, or cancellation.
The completion of ObR manually records the obligation. Before that, the document will be
reviewed, verified and approved by the authorized users in Budget Division.
Navigation:
Menu ► Purchasing ► Purchase Requisition
o Not Posted Reason: Users must provide a reason for not posting the voucher when
voucher is Temp Saved; the field is cleared automatically when the voucher is
completely saved.
o Currency: To allow the user to select the Currency of the PR. Default is Domestic
Currency.
o Exchange Rate: Exchange rate for the chosen currency other than Local Currency.
o Goods/Services Domestic Amount: System calculated values, based on the total
Domestic amounts of all the Goods/Services in the PR Item.
o Domestic Tax Amount: System calculated values, from the respective values of the
PR Items.
o Total Domestic Amount: System calculated values from the Domestic amounts plus
Taxes, from all PR Items.
o External Source Voucher: Read-only field updated by the system if the Voucher
Source value is another external source.
o Source Document Number: Read-only field updated by system. It shows Source
Document number if the voucher source value is another external source.
o Batch Number: Read-only field that shows Batch number for imported requisition.
o Create Commitment: Read-only attribute. Indicates if the system will automatically
create a commitment when the current Requisition is approved. This field will be
Display-only if the parameter allows creating Requisitions without Commitments is
False. Default value is checked (True).
o Commitment: The system will automatically assign a Commitment ID when the
‘Create Commitment’ attribute is True. The system provides a detail button in front of
this attribute. Once clicked by users the system will open Commitment screen to view
the details.
o Purchasing Vehicle: This is used to define the specific threshold limits for each type
of purchase.
o Purchasing Office: ID of the Purchasing Office. It is the Operating unit that processes
the PR and follows it up.
o Ship To: This returns the code of the Operating Unit that places the requisition. This
entity refers to the Institution catalogue. This is also used among other entities in the
system.
o Invoice To: This returns the code of the operating unit that will be billed for the
requisition.
o Requester: This is the code of the Operating Unit that requested for the items in the
requisition.
o Buyer Acknowledge: Automatically updated by the system once the buyer has
acknowledged the requisition in the workflow.
o Acknowledgment Date: Automatically updated by the system once the buyer has
acknowledged the requisition in the workflow. The default date is the date of the
acknowledgement.
o Inspected At: This is the code of the Operating Unit where the requisition will be
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
BUTTON FUNCTION
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
The PR is a form used to request purchase of certain quantity of goods, such as supplies or
property, or services. This is a function of the RC, which could be bureau, service/division, or
office (BSO) requesting the purchase of the item/s. The transaction Creators and First-line
Approvers shall represent the requesting unit. The Creator will record all the information
regarding required goods/services: quantity, price, procurement mode, description, etc.
The above certification will trigger the automatic creation of commitment when the final
approver approves the PR. The final approver or Third-line Approver in the workflow is the
Administrative Service or division, as is the current practice. This step is centralized per
agency so all PRs shall course through the one user assigned to finally approve them and
hence create commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
As with requisitions, users can create POs with multiple items, which in turn, can be delivered
in multiple drops over multiple fiscal years. A single requisition, multiple requisitions, or no
requisitions, can be used to define a PO. The system will allow linking of requisitions to a PO
only if the requisition has been committed and approved by the respective authorized
personnel.
Navigation
Menu ► Purchasing ► Purchase Order
o Delivery Mode: System will present this in a dropdown list, user can select a value.
This field is optional.
o Delivery Terms: System will present this in a dropdown list, user can select a value.
This field is optional.
o Purchasing Vehicle: Used to define the type of POs and their relevant rules. This field
is mandatory.
o Purchasing Office: This refers to the institution configured as purchasing office in the
system. This is a mandatory field.
o Ship To: System will default this value if available based on the 'Receiving Location'
of the Purchasing Office selected by the user. If this PO has a related PR, and such
PR has Ship to Location value, then such value takes precedence over the value
related to ‘Purchasing Office' attribute. User can change the value.
o Invoice To: System will default this value if available based on the 'Invoice to Office'
of the Purchasing Office selected by the user. If this PO has a related PR, and such
PR has Invoice to Office value, then such value takes precedence over the value
related to ‘Purchasing Office' attribute. User can change the value.
o Inspected At: System will default this value if available based on the 'Inspection
Location' of the Purchasing Office selected by the user. If this PO has a related PR,
and such PR has Invoice to Office value, then such value takes precedence over the
value related to ‘Inspection Location' attribute. User can change the value.
o Requester: Requester ID, if the Institution that the creating user (employee) belongs
to is defined as Purchasing Office, then default equals the user's Institution Code. This
field is mandatory. If multiple PRs assigned, this field is only optional.
o Created By: Populated automatically by the system at creation time of the record. This
is the user ID of the user who created the PO.
o Creation Date: Populated automatically by the system at creation time of the record.
o Approved By: Populated automatically by the system when corresponding workflow
reaches its last Approval stage. This is the user ID of the Approver of the PO.
o Approval Date: Populated automatically by the system when corresponding workflow
reaches its last Approval stage.
o Language: Country specific language used for entering the description and other
information.
o Description: A Brief description of the PO. This is a mandatory field.
o Template Name: This field is used to enter the template name that can be used for
retrieval; this field is mandatory if the 'Is Template' is ticked.
o Special Instructions: Free text field to allow the users to enter any Special
Instructions related to the PO.
o Sole Source Justification: Free Text field that allows the users to enter the reason
for all the requested items to come from only one vendor or supplier if required.
o Managed Contract: This field is mandatory if 'Is Contract Amendment' is ticked. The
user must be allowed to select contracts where Contact Source is equal to 'Original'
and these are in Status 'In Execution' and 'Closed'.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
The PO is a form or document used by NGA to purchase goods or services. The document is
addressed to a supplier to deliver specific quantities of supplies, goods or property, subject to
terms and conditions contained in the PO. This is a function of BSOs performing purchasing
roles.
For example, the Procurement Management Division (PMD) in DBM and the Property and
Supply Management Division (PSMD) in BTr are handling the purchasing function of the
respective agencies. So, the PO Creators and First-line Approvers shall come from these
operating units.
division for review and certification. He/she has the option to send “Back to Creator”
when upon review the PO requires modification, updating, or cancellation.
Just like the approval of PR, the authorized user from Budget division will review, verify and
approve the PO. The approval of PO by the Chief Budget Officer certifies the availability of
funds or CAF.
Navigation
Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Note
This is what the Goods Received / Return Note page looks like:
o Packing Slip Reference: Free field used to enter reference or details related to the
Packing Slip.
o Delivery Mode: This field is available only when Note Type is Receive, otherwise this
field is hidden.
o Source: Calculated/Updated Read-only Field to show the source of the
Receive/Return Note: Manual, Contract Management Default is Manual.
o Inspection Reference: Free field used to enter reference or details related to the
Inspection
o Created By: Display-only; This is the user ID of the creator of the Receive/Return Note
o Creation Date: Display field only. This is the current system date.
o Approved By: Display field only. This is the ID of the one who approved the
Receive/Return Note
o Approval Date: Display field only. This is the date when the workflow reaches the
Approved Stage.
o Language: Country specific language used for entering the remarks and other
information.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
Once goods, property or services are received, the Receiving Unit or Office, such as PSD or
PSMD and General Services Division (GSD), will need to create Goods Receipt Notes. The
related PO shall be referenced to record the transaction against it.
Report (IAR) to validate the receipt of the goods. The IAR is a duly signed report from the
Inspection Committee on the inspection of the purchased supplies, goods, equipment or
property, and the PSD on the acceptance of the same.
See diagram below for the workflow process for Goods Receive/Return Note:
Navigation
Menu ► Payment Management ► Disbursement Voucher
o Fiscal Year: Fiscal year of the voucher is mentioned in this field. Default value is current
fiscal year (FY). User cannot select any closed fiscal year.
o Fiscal Period: Fiscal period of the voucher is mentioned in this field. Default value is
Current Fiscal Period. Voucher can only be posted in opened fiscal period, which means
user cannot post voucher to a closed fiscal period.
o Voucher ID: This is unique identification number of the voucher. Once the voucher is
saved the system automatically generates the voucher ID. The structure of the ID is Fund
Cluster code (2 digit), Institution code (6 digit), Document Type (3 digit), Fiscal Year (4
digit), Fiscal Month (2 digit) and serial number (5 digit) (Ex.- 01-11005-DV-2016-12-
00001). Once a Voucher is saved and the voucher ID is generated, it cannot be repeated
even if it is cancelled.
o Voucher Date: Users can select the voucher date in this field. Default value is current
system date.
o DV Classification: Users specified classification of the DV.
o Accounting Office: Users need to insert Accounting Office Code. Accounting office
means the operating unit the transaction is for.
o Workflow Status: This field indicates current workflow process status of the DV. The
default value is created.
o No. Supporting document: The user should mention here number of supporting
documents attached to the voucher.
o PO Related Expense Voucher: This field indicates if the DV is related with PO or not.
If this field is true, user needs to select in the next field, called “PO”.
o Contract Number: Contract number of the Accounting Office which is selected in the
Accounting Office field.
o Posting Status: This field is automatically updated by the system. Status may be Saved
or Temp Saved.
o Temp Number: Serial Number generated by the system when the voucher is Temp
Saved.
o Not Posted Reason: Select a reason for not posting when the voucher is Temp Saved.
Field automatically cleared when the voucher is posted (completely saved).
o Batch Number: This is a Read-only field that shows the Batch Number for imported
of the voucher e.g. Manual, PO, Payroll, Assets, Inventory, and Other External Source.
This is what the DV page looks like:
o Is Template: This field indicates if the DV can be used as a template for recurring
vouchers. Default value is False.
o External Source Voucher: Read-only field updated by the system if the Voucher
Source is ‘Other External Source”.
o Created By: This is populated automatically by the system at creation time of the record.
The user name of the creator of the voucher will be indicated here.
o Created Date: This field is populated automatically by the system at the time of creation
of the record.
o Approval By: This field is populated automatically by the system when DV reaches its
last approval stage.
o Approved Date: This field is populated automatically by the system when DV reaches
its last approval stage.
o Language: Select the language used to register the description.
o Description: Users can manually enter the Voucher Description.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
The DV is a form used to pay an obligation to employees, individuals, agencies, or creditors
for goods purchased or services rendered. In BTMS, DV originates from the requesting BSO.
Approved DVs by the requesting BSO Head will be forwarded to the Accounting Division for
Navigation
Menu ► Cash Management ► Payments ► Create Payment Extracts
o Fiscal Year: Payment Extract Fiscal Year. Default is current fiscal year. However, the
user can specify the previous year if it is still open for Payment Extract Generation.
o Fiscal Period: Fiscal period of the extract. Default is current period. User can select
another Fiscal Period which is open for the Payment Extract Generation.
o Accounting Office: Read-only field. User needs to select the Office where the
Payment Extract is used for. This will return the code of the Institution selected.
o Is Include Accounting Office: This check box is automatically displayed once the
Accounting Office is selected. The user can check this if the accounting office is to be
included in the Payment Extract Generation.
o DV Source: Dropdown list. User can select from the list the applicable source of the
Payment Extract Generation. User can select DVs having the same attributes by
selecting the group representing the vouchers.
o Date: The date the extract was created. Default is Current date.
o Grouped Cheques: Indicates if multiple invoices having common criteria have been
grouped into one cheque. Default as defined in the Expenditures Parameters. The
system must apply the following rules for grouping: same Vendor, same Treasury Bank
Account ID, same Currency, and same Payment Method.
o Due Date From: Earliest due date of payments to be included in extract.
o Due Date To: Latest due date of payments to be included in extract.
o DV Source: User can input the number of the DV for Payment Extract Generation.
This is applicable for a ‘one DV-one cheque’ payment transaction.
o Vendor: User can select a specific vendor by populating the Vendor ID of the vendor
whose invoices are to be included in the extract.
o Treasury Bank Account: TBA assigned to the payments to be included in the extract.
o Financial Institution: User can select the bank where the treasury has its account.
This returns the code of the Bank selected.
o Currency: Currency of the payments to be included in the payment extract.
o Payment Mode: Dropdown list. Payment mode of the payments that will be included
in the extract. User can select from the dropdown list the applicable payment mode.
o Payment Location: User can select from the dropdown list the payment Location of
the payments to be included in the extract.
o Payment Method: User can select from the dropdown list the method of the payments
that will be included in the extract.
o Domestic Amount From: Minimum domestic amount for the payments that will be
included in the extract. Default amount is Zero.
o Domestic Amount To: Maximum domestic amount for the payments that will be
included in the extract. Cannot be less than the value in the ‘Domestic Amount From’
field. Default is Zero.
o Language: Select the Language used to register the Description. Default language is
English.
o Description: User can input additional remarks for the Payment Extract generation.
o DV Payment Detail: Expense Vouchers list to include in the Payment Extract. The
user can select 1 or more (for grouped cheque transaction) DV to process.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
BUTTON FUNCTION
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
The Payment Extract Payments screen contains the information regarding Cheques or
electronic transfers, and the workflow control of Extracts. A Cheque/Transfer register could be
the summary of several invoices related to a single vendor.
Navigation
Menu ► Cash Management ► Payments ► Payment Extract Payment
o ID: This is an automatically generated number by the system once the Payment Extract
generation is completed.
o Workflow Status: This field indicates the current workflow of the Payment Extract
Payment. The following are the stages of the workflow: ‘Created’, ‘Approval
Requested’, ‘Approved’, 'Cancelled', 'Delivered', 'Released', 'Void', 'Returned', and
‘Confirmed'. The value is ‘Created’
o Payment Extract: Read-only field. This is the system generated ID from Payment
Extract Generation.
o Payment Method: Read-only field. Displays the mode of payment for the payment
extract.
o TBA: Read-only field. TBA where payments will be released from.
o Bank Account: Read-only field. Automatically populated by the system based on the
Vendor Entity setup. Bank account of the vendor.
o Branch: Read-only field. Automatically populated by the system based on the Vendor
Entity setup. This is the branch of the bank account of the vendor.
o Bank Account Name: Read-only field. Automatically populated by the system based
on the Vendor Entity setup. This is the bank account name of the vendor.
o Created On: Read-only field. Date automatically assigned by the system when this
payment is created.
o Created By: Read-only field. User name automatically assigned by the system when
this payment is created.
o Approved On: Read-only field. Date automatically assigned by the system when this
payment is Approved.
o Approved By: Read-only field. User name automatically assigned by the system when
this payment is Approved.
o Expired Cheque Journal Voucher: Indicates the JEV ID for the expired checks.
o Check Lot Number: To indicate check lot number.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
User Roles
In BTMS, the settlement of liabilities or actual cash payments passes through generation of
Payment Extracts and Payment Extract Payments. Once the Payment Extract Generation is
done, the Payment Extract Payment is automatically created. Once the Payment Extract is
approved to be delivered, an automatic JEV is posted. But if the Payment Extract is tagged as
Void, the JEV is reversed.
The authorized approver will provide the final approval for all payment transactions.
disbursement-payments. In the case of DBM Central Office, the Cash Division Chief
will approve all transactions amounting below 5 million pesos. This will be sent to the
Admin Service Director for release approval. For transaction amounts that are equal
to or more than 5 million pesos, the Cash Division Chief will provide approval and send
to Secretary or his delegated Undersecretary or Assistant Secretary for release
approval.
Navigation
Menu ► Receipt Management ► Revenue Voucher
o Batch Number: Read-only Field, shows the Batch Number for imported JVs.
o Customer: Customer Code.
o Sold to Customer: If the RV is under a different Customer Name, users can select
the Sold To Customer Code. The RV then gets charged on the Customer Code.
o Currency: Selects a currency in which the RV is registered from the drop down list.
o Exchange Rate: Shows the latest active exchange rate for the selected currency.
o Is Template?: To indicate if the RV can be used as template for recurring vouchers.
Default is False.
o Template Name: To enter the template name that can be used for retrieval.
o Recurs on Next Period?: An indicator to automatically duplicate the RV in the next
period and Temp Save it upon period closing. Default is No.
o RV Domestic Amount: Display-only Field, displays the Total domestic amount of all
RV Items.
o RV Foreign Amount: Display-only Field, displays the Total foreign amount of all RV
Items.
o Domestic Tax Amount: Display-only Field, displays the Total Domestic Tax amount
of all RV Items.
o Foreign Tax Amount: Display-only Field, displays the Total Foreign Tax amount of all
RV Items.
o RV Total Domestic Amount: Display-only Field, displays RV Domestic Amount +
Domestic Tax Amount.
o RV Total Foreign Amount: Display-only Field, displays RV Foreign Amount + Foreign
Tax Amount.
o Received Domestic Amount: Display-only Field, updates by the system when a
Receipt Voucher applied against the current RV is created and approved. Default is
Zero.
o Received Foreign Amount: Display-only Field, updates by the system when a
Receipt Voucher applied against the current RV is created and approved. Default is
Zero.
o Outstanding Domestic Amount: Display-only Field, gets calculated by the system
equals RV Total Domestic Amount - Received Domestic Amount.
o Outstanding Foreign Amount: Display-only Field, gets calculated by the system
equals RV Total Foreign Amount - Received Foreign Amount.
o JEV: Read-only Field, shows the ID of the JEV auto-generated when the RV is
approved. The system populates the JV ID.
o Is Automatically Generated?: Display-only Field that indicates if the RV was
Automatically Generated by the system through other function or manually created by
users. The default is False.
o Paid Status: Updated automatically by the system when a Cash Receipt is received
against the RV. The field shows one of the following values: ‘No’, ‘partially’’, and ‘Yes’.
The default value is No.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
RV is prepared and generated in BTMS to recognize the revenue or collection. This form shall
be prepared based on a bill and for each payor.
This document, which is the system version of the Order of Payment, will be approved through
the workflow process.
Navigation
Menu ► Receipt Management ► Revenue Receipt Voucher
o Exchange Rate: This field Will show the latest active exchange rate for the selected
currency which is linked to Expenditures, users have the option to change the rate if
allowed in the Currency parameters, otherwise this field is Display-only and updated
only by the system when the currency is selected. Default is 1 (because default
currency is Domestic). If the general parameter 'System Accepts Multi-Currency
Transactions.
o Receipt Total Domestic Amount: This is a Display-only field which displays the Total
domestic amount of all Receipt Items. Default value is Zero.
o Receipt Total Foreign Amount: This is a Display-only field, displays the total foreign
amount of all Receipt Items. Default value is Zero.
o Offset Code: Field contains offset coding for the Receipt Voucher.
o Bank Account: Government’s Bank Account where the payment is deposited. Only
Bank Accounts (linked to the selected TBA) having the currency same as the voucher
currency are allowed.
o Payment Mode: Default value is automatically populated from the selected Customer
information if defined, if not defined in the Customer, then it is populated from the
selected Institution, if not defined in the Institution then default will populated be as
defined in the Revenue Parameters.
o Fiscal Year: Field contains Fiscal Year of the voucher, Default is current Fiscal Year.
o Fiscal Period: Field contains Fiscal Period of the voucher, Default is current period.
o Posting Status: This field is a Display-only field and is updated by the system when
the voucher is either saved (then the attribute is updated to Save) or temp saved (then
the attribute is updated to Temp Saved).
o Temp#: This field is a Display-only field. The Temp number is generated by the system
when the voucher is Temp Saved.
o Not Posted Reason: Users will select a reason for not posting the voucher when
voucher is Temp Saved. The field should be cleared automatically when the voucher
is completely saved.
o JEV: Read-only field, shows the ID of the JV auto-generated when the Receipt is
approved. JV ID is populated by the system. A hyperlink is to be provided to drill down
to the relevant JV; when clicked, a new window will open to display the attributes of
the relevant JV from the JEV entity.
o Language: The Country specific language used in adding the description should be
selected from this.
o Template Name: Users should enter the template name. Users can enter template
name when RRV is saved as template for future use. Users can use “RETRIVE FROM
REVENUE RECEIPT VOUCHER TEMPLATE” in the Insert mode and direct search
with the template name which was entered as a template name when template was
entered.
o Description: Voucher description is mentioned in this field. This is for additional
information of receipt voucher.
o RRV Item Tab: This tab allows the attaching of the Receipt Voucher Items.
o Attachments Tab: This tab allows attaching files that the Institution may consider
relevant for supporting the Receipt Voucher Each file may have a Title, Description,
Date, User, and document Language.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
In the case of acquiring an asset by purchase, manual creation of the asset item is not
required. When goods are received, the note is approved and the system creates one asset
item in the asset register as Temp Save with some minimum information. Afterwards, the user
needs to update the asset item with particular details, like Asset Class, Acquisition information,
Brand, Details description etc. and follow the approval process. If the asset item is saved, the
system does not allow users to Create Goods Return Note.
In cases of acquiring assets by Construction and Donation, the user needs to create the asset
item manually and follow the approval process.
Navigation
Navigate the Menu ►Property Plant and Equipment ►Asset Items
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
BUTTON FUNCTION
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
Maintenance of Asset Registry is a special function of the Property and Supply Division in
close coordination with the Accounting Division for proper recording of asset transactions.
See diagram below for the workflow process of Asset Item in BTMS:
Asset transaction includes the processes of disposal through auction, disposal through
donation, disposal through destruction, periodic functions of PPE (e.g. depreciation, or change
in operational status), and major improvements and maintenance of PPE that increase the
asset value.
Navigation
Menu ►Property Plant and Equipment ►Asset Transactions
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
See diagram below for the workflow process of Asset Transaction in BTMS:
Navigation
Menu ►Property Plant and Equipment ►Custody Transactions
when printing the Assets in Custody responsibility acceptance, the name of this
person must appear.
o Review Responsible Employee: This is the employee responsible for the physical
review before applying the release of custody
o Language: Language used for the additional details of the custody transaction.
o Observation: The user may enter observations relevant to this assignment /
release.
BUTTON FUNCTION
New/ Create
Search
Results
Find
BUTTON FUNCTION
Look Up
Remove Item
Select All
Unselect All
User Roles
Role No. 1: Creator
The authorized user from the PSD will register the Custody Transaction in the system.
It will then be submitted to the Division Chief for review and approval.
See diagram below for the workflow process of Custody Transaction in BTMS:
Should the User choose to self-change his or her password, follow the steps below:
Step 1. Navigate to Change Password: Menu ► Admin ► System Security ► Users ►
Change Password
Step 2. Enter the default password once, and the new password twice. Then click the
Update button.
Aside from making your password easy to remember here are some guidelines:
i. Must contain letters and numbers
ii. The length must be at least 8 characters
iii. You cannot repeat the previous password
iv. The password must be entered twice to ensure that there are no typing
errors
Step 3. A confirmation message will appear. Click OK to complete the process.
3 4
5
1
6
2 7
Note to the User: Once you’ve finished your transactions, always remember to log
out of the system. System is configured for a 5-minute idle time for security purposes.
NO ACTIVITY (not just moving the mouse but clicking on buttons and input fields) for
5 minutes, the system automatically logs you out.
Fundamentally, there are two high level types of transactions, Budget Execution and
Accounting transactions. Budget Execution transactions comprise of Commitment, Obligation,
and Disbursements, while Accounting transactions are undertaken through automatic and
manual recording.
remittances, remittance of employee loan payments, and processing other employee benefits.
Two User Roles are primarily involved in the process: the Creator who creates Obligation and
DV, and the First-Line Approver who is the Head of the BSO who certifies the transactions.
Users need to log in to the system and transact salaries and related remittances.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Obligation for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Budget Division which makes the
final review and approval of the obligation.
Payments under Direct Expense Method are made through the Authorized Government
Servicing Bank (AGSB), which would credit the net amount of periodic pay directly to the
employees’ bank accounts. The preparation of DV would require links to corresponding ObR,
and the approved transaction would be recorded as direct expense.
The Creator should follow the steps below to create DV, which would be linked to
corresponding ObR for payroll:
Step 1. Navigate to DV: Menu ► Payment Management ► DVs.
Step 2. By default, the voucher opens in Search mode. Press New button to create
a new voucher.
Step 3. Some required information is automatically filled out based on the User credentials.
Update when necessary.
Step 4. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to select the specific Vendor from
the list. Vendor here refers to the name of the AGSB:
Land Bank of the Philippines (LBP)
Development Bank of the Philippines (DBP)
Philippine Veterans Bank (PVB)
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the Treasury Bank
Account (TBA), and then select the appropriate bank account from the list, example:
TBA Funding
Code Abbreviation Description
Type Source
10104040-00-001-001 MDS-2-0001-510-5 (ADA) Virtual 01101101 Payment by
ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
TBA Funding
Code Abbreviation Description
Type Source
10104040-00-001-001A MDS-2-0001-510-5 (CHQ) Virtual 01101101 Payment by
Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
1010404000-02-03 A MDS 2370-9002-16 (ADA) Physical 01101406 Payment by
ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, Pension
& Gratuity Fund
1010404000-02-05 A MDS 2-00027-560-5 (ADA) Physical 01101407 Payment by
ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, Misc
Personnel
Benefit Fund
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset
Codes, and then select Due to Officers and Employees – 2 01 01 020 00
Step 7. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 8. Click on Import Obligation Item button at the lowest icon panel to import the
approved ObR created for the payroll disbursement. System will open Obligation Item screen
to find the related obligation.
Note to the User: Unless the Budget Division Chief finally approves the related
ObR, it would not display in the list.
Step 9. Enter the ObR number in the ID field, if known. If not, click the Lookup and
Search buttons to display the list of approved ObRs. Then select the specific ObR for
this disbursement.
Step 10. The system will automatically carry forward to the DV form all the obligation items.
To add salary deductible items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-
up screen under the attachments tab.
Step 11. At the pop-up screen, enter the amount with negative (-) sign and then complete the
UACS Coding Block.
Step 12. Type in the Description of the deduction and click Save and return icon .
Do the same for all other deductions, such as the following:
Due to BIR – 2 02 01 010 00
Due to GSIS - Life and Retirement Premiums – 2 02 01 020 01
Due to GSIS - Salary Loan – 2 02 01 020 03
Due to GSIS - Policy Loan – 2 02 01 020 04
Due to PAG-IBIG - PAG-IBIG Premiums – 2 02 01 030 01
Due to PAG-IBIG - PAG-IBIG Multi-Purpose Loan – 2 02 01 030 02
Due to PAG-IBIG - PAG-IBIG Housing Loan – 2 02 01 030 03
Due to PHILHEALTH – 2 02 01 040 00
Other Payables – 2 99 99 990 00 (could be used for other deductions for remittance
to other institutions)
Step 13. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Note to the user: In case of partial payment or installment payment, user can
click on the default created payment detail and modify/change it and can add
another payment detail by clicking new button under Payment Detail Tab.
Remember that total amount defined in Payment detail and total amount of DV
line item must be equal.
Step 14. Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and Return
button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 15. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
4.1.1.3.1 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Head of
BSO or the HRD Chief to certify the disbursement. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
Step 3. Enter the new Attachment information. Fields with an asterisk (*) are mandatory fields.
Step 4. Click the icon and select the document users wish to attach.
Step 5. Click on the Save and Return icon to save the Attachment information and
return to the main screen, or click on the Discard icon to discard the Attachment
information and return to the main screen.
The following are the required supporting documents for Payroll disbursements as prescribed
by COA Circular No. 2012-001 dated June 14, 2012, amended by COA Circular No. 2013-001
dated January 10, 2013:
1. Salaries and PERA under Regular Payroll
a. Payroll Register
2. Actual Salary and PERA for those cancelled from Regular Payroll
a. Daily Time Record approved by Supervisor
b. Explanation for cancellation from Regular Payroll/Notice of Assumption
c. Approved Application for Leave (if necessary)
d. Copy of Bill (if necessary)
e. Certificate of Clearance (if necessary)
f. Pass Slip (if necessary)
g. Medical Certificate (if necessary)
3. First Salary
a. Certified true copy of duly approved appointment
b. Certified true copy of Oath of Office
c. Certificate of Actual Assumption of Duties and Responsibilities
d. Statement of Assets, Liabilities and Net Worth
e. Daily Time Record approved by Supervisor
f. Certificate of Last Salary received (if transferred from other government
agency)
g. BIR Form 2316 – Certificate of Compensation Payment / Tax Withheld (if
transferred from other government agency)
4. Last Salary
a. Approved letter of resignation/retirement
b. Daily Time Record approved by Supervisor
c. Certified true copy of Leave Card audited by COA
d. Certificate of Clearance
e. Service Record
f. Statement of Assets, Liabilities and Net Worth
g. Copy of Bill (if necessary)
h. Certificate of no outstanding bills
5. Maternity Leave Commutation
a. Medical Certificate
b. Approved Application for Leave
c. Service Record
d. Certificate of Clearance
6. Salary before the expiration of Maternity Leave
a. Medical Certificate that the employee is fit to work
b. Certificate of assumption
c. Daily Time Record approved by Supervisor
d. Certified true copy of Certificate of Clearance for Maternity leave
e. Certified true copy of Approved Application for Leave
7. Salary Differential due to Promotion and/or Step Increment
a. Certified true copy of Appointment in case of promotion or Notice of Salary
Adjustment in case of step increment/salary increase
b. Certificate of Assumption
c. Approved Daily Time Record or Certification that the employee has not incurred
leave without pay
d. Payroll
8. Salary / Allowances / Benefits due to heirs of the Deceased Employees
a. Same requirement as those for salary / allowances / benefits
b. NSO-authenticated Death Certificate
c. NSO-authenticated Marriage Contract (if applicable)
d. NSO-authenticated Birth Certificate of surviving legal heirs
e. Designation of next-of-kin
f. Waiver of right of children 18yo and above
9. Commutable Representation and Transportation Allowance
a. Certified true copy of Appointment (for first claim)
b. Certificate of Assumption (for first payment)
c. Payroll
10. Reimbursable Representation and Transportation Allowance
a. Copy of Office Order (for first claim)
b. Certificate of Assumption (for first payment)
c. Certification that the official/employee did not use government vehicle and is
not assigned any government vehicle
d. Certificate or evidence of service rendered or approved Daily Time Record
e. Payroll
11. Clothing / Uniform Allowance
a. Certified true copy of Appointment/Service Record (for new employee)
b. Certificate of Assumption (for new employee)
c. Certificate of non-payment from previous employer (if transferee)
d. Payroll
12. Productivity Incentive Allowance
a. Certificate of Ranking of employees showing that the performance ratings for
the two semesters given are at least satisfactory
b. Certification that the employee/s has no administrative charge
c. Payroll
13. Honoraria for Government Procurement (Bids and Awards Committee (BAC))
a. Office Order creating and designating the BAC composition and authorizing the
members to collect honoraria
b. Minutes of BAC Meeting
c. Notice of Award to the winning bidder of procurement activity being claimed
d. Certification that the procurement involves competitive bidding
e. Attendance Sheet listing the names of attendees during the BAC meetings
f. BAC Resolution
g. List of contracts awarded
h. Certificate of collection and deposit made from the sale of bid documents
i. For honoraria charged against Trust Receipts
i. Payroll
14. Honoraria for Lecturer / Resource Person / Coordinator / Facilitator
a. Office Order
b. Coordinator’s certificate of services rendered by the Lecturer / Resource
Person / Facilitator
c. Course syllabus / Program of lectures
d. Contract or Agreement of Engagement
15. Honoraria for Special Projects
a. Performance evaluation plan formulated by project management used as basis
for rating the performance of members
b. Office Order designating the composition of the special project and authorizing
the members to collect honoraria
c. Terms of Reference
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
1* refers to the default value of the Organization/Institution Code while ** refers to the selected
Responsibility Center. The applies to all the entries herein illustrated.
Advances for Payroll Method are payments made through a Disbursing Officer, who would
pay the net amount of periodic pay directly to the employees either in the form of cash or bank
transfers via the Payroll Fund account in an AGSB. The preparation of DV would require
special classification, being Advances for Payroll, subsidiary ledger account of the Disbursing
Officer, and liquidation of advances within five days after each fifteen (15) day/end of the
month pay period. as required in Section 5 of COA Circular No. 97-002 dated February 10,
1997.
If payroll payments are made through Cash Advance, the Creator should follow the steps
below to create DV:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Payment Management ► DVs.
Step 2. By default, the form opens in Search mode. Press New button to create a
new voucher.
Step 3. Some required information is automatically filled out based on the User credentials.
Update when necessary.
Step 4. Click the dropdown list to select the DV Classification. Choose Advances for Payroll.
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to select the specific Vendor from
the list. Then look for the specific name of the authorized Disbursing Officer. Normally, the
Cashier or Cash Division Chief is assigned as the Disbursing Officer.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the TBA, and then
select the appropriate bank account from the list, example:
Funding
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Description
Source
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001 510-5 (ADA) ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Funding
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Description
Source
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Due to Officers and Employees – 2 01 01 020 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 99 01 020 00 – Advances for Payroll
Step 11. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Sub-ledger
codes, and then look for the specific name of the authorized Disbursing Officer to choose.
Step 12. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 13. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 14. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 15. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
4.1.1.4.2 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the
Employee, Disbursing Officer or Custodian’s immediate Supervisor or the Head of BSO he/she
belongs. This will then be forwarded to the Accounting Division Processor for review, then to
the Accounting Division Chief for approval, and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the
payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
The following are the required supporting documents for Payroll disbursements:
1. Salaries and PERA under Regular Payroll
a. Payroll Register
2. Liquidation of Cash Advance
a. Liquidation Report
b. Official Receipt (in case of refund of excess cash advance)
These supporting documents should be scanned in pdf format to be uploaded as attachment
in the system.
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
The liquidation of payroll advances is expected within five days after each fifteen (15) day/end
of the month pay period. as required in Section 5 of COA Circular No. 97-002 dated February
10, 1997. The authorized Disbursing Officer should prepare the Liquidation Report and submit
to Accounting Division for recording in the books of accounts. The Creator from Accounting
Division should prepare a JEV in BTMS.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate to JEV: Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► JEV. By default, users
will be in Search Mode.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the JEV Item, browse down and look for the Obligation field.
Step 6. Click the Lookup button and enter the Obligation ID number, if known. Or click
the Lookup and Search buttons to select the ObR from the list corresponding
to the payroll advances. Once the ObR is chosen, the system automatically fills out the correct
UACS Coding Block and debit amount fields.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full coding block used
in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 99 01 020 00 – Advances for Payroll
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV. A window appears
to confirm the new JEV creation.
The JEV will be routed to the Accounting Division Chief for approval. Once the document/form
is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about the assignment. This
would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The
Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The tax deductions from Payroll are credited to the Due to BIR Account (2 02 01 010). There
are two ways to record remittances to BIR: Cash Remittances or through Tax Remittance
Advice (TRA). Refer to Section 3.7.5 for the remittance through TRA.
If Cash Remittance is observed, the Creator should follow the steps below to create DV:
Step 1. Navigate to DV: Menu ► Payment Management ► DVs.
Step 2. By default, the form opens in Search mode. Press New button to create a
new voucher.
Step 3. Some required information is automatically filled out based on the User credentials.
Update when necessary.
Step 4. Click the dropdown list of the DV Classification and choose Due to Various
Organizations.
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to select the Vendor from the list.
Choose the vendor, Bureau of Internal Revenue or BIR.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the TBA, and then
select the appropriate bank account from the list, as follows:
Funding
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Description
Source
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001 510-5 (ADA) ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2 02 01 010 00 – Due to BIR
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
The payable amounts to GSIS are recorded under General Ledger Code 2 02 01 020 with the
following Sub-Object Codes:
01 – Retirement and Life Insurance Premium (RLIP)
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Codes:
2 02 01 020 01 – Due to GSIS – Retirement and Life Insurance Premium
2 02 01 020 02 – Due to GSIS – Employees Compensation Commission
2 02 01 020 03 – Due to GSIS – Salary Loan
2 02 01 020 04 – Due to GSIS – Policy Loan
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
The payable amounts to Pag-IBIG are recorded under General Ledger Code 2 02 01 030 with
the following Sub-Object Codes:
01 – Pag-IBIG Premiums
02 – Pag-IBIG Multi-Purpose Loan
03 – Housing Loan.
These liability accounts are recorded upon withholding of personal share from the payroll
computations. To remit the personal share of the employee, the Creator should follow the
steps below to create DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
These liability accounts are recorded upon withholding of personal share from the payroll
computations. To remit the personal share of the employee, the Creator should follow the
steps below to create DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2 02 01 040 00 – Due to PHILHEALTH
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Deductions for other third-party payroll liabilities are made against the payrolls and remitted to
the respective creditors. A list of employees for whom deductions have been made and
remitted is forwarded with the Remittance Payment so that the PLIs and Others may credit
the individuals appropriately at their end.
To remit the amounts, the Creator should follow the steps below to create DV:
Step 1. Navigate to DV: Menu ► Payment Management ► DVs.
Step 2. By default, the form opens in Search mode. Press New button to create a
new voucher.
Step 3. Some required information is automatically filled out based on the User credentials.
Update when necessary.
Step 4. Click the dropdown list of the DV Classification and choose Remittances to various
organizations.
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to select the Vendor from the list.
Choose the appropriate PLI or institution.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the TBA, and then
select the appropriate bank account from the list, as follows:
Funding
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Description
Source
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001 510-5 (ADA) ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Funding
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Description
Source
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2 99 99 990 00 – Other Payables
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
The following are the required supporting documents for statutory remittances:
1. Remittances to BIR
a. BIR Form No. 1601C - Monthly Remittance Return of Income Taxes Withheld
on Compensation
2. Remittances to GSIS
a. Electronic Remittance Form
3. Remittances to Pag-IBIG
a. Membership Contributions Remittance Form
4. Remittances to PHILHEALTH
a. Employer’s Remittance Report
5. Remittances to Other Creditors
a. List of Monthly Amortization
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
1. Remittance to BIR
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020101000/** – Due to BIR
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
2. Remittance to GSIS
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020102001/** – RLIP
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020102002/** – ECC
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020102003/** – Salary Loan
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020102004/** – Policy Loan
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
3. Remittance to Pag-IBIG
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020103001/** – Pag-IBIG Premiums
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020103002/** – Multipurpose Loan
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020103003/** – Housing Loan
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
4. Remittance to PHIC
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020104000/** – Due to PHILHEALTH
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
5. Other Remittances
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2999999000/** – Other Payables
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
adjustment is made through the preparation of the Budget Control Update Voucher (BCUV).
To prepare the budget adjustments, the Budget Officer shall do the following:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Budget Management ► Budget Control Update Voucher
Step 2. By default, the form opens in Search Mode. Click on New button to create new
voucher.
Step 3. Click on Budget Control Type and select Allotment from the dropdown list.
Step 4. Click on Voucher Type and select Transfer from the dropdown list.
Step 5. Check the tick box for “Update Higher Level Budget Controls.” This will automatically
update the higher-level budget control, which in this case, is the Appropriation.
Step 6. Type in the Transaction Description
Step 7. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 8. Complete the UACS coding block for the debit allotment item, enter the Debit amount,
and type in the specific Description. Note that the debit account shall be the Object Code to
which the budget transfer shall be made.
Fund Source
Main Payroll Expenditures: General Fund, Specific Budget of Agency – 01 1 01
101
PAP
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency, subjected to adjustments. Normally, the pay is charged to General
Admin and Support - General Management and Supervision – 1 0 00 00 1
00001 000
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The
system applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see his or
her own Organization Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
Overtime Pay – 5 01 02 130 01
Step 9. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom.
Step 10. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 11. Complete the UACS coding block for the credit allotment item, enter the Credit
amount, and type in the specific Description. Note that the credit account shall be the Object
Code, which the budget amount to be transferred shall be taken out. Follow the same elements
selected for the debit account, except for the Object Code.
Object Code
Salaries and Wages-Basic Salary-Civilian – 5 01 01 010 01
Step 12. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom.
Step 13. Click on the Attachment Tab to attach supporting
documents. As much as possible, scan in pdf format and upload the approved RAPSA to
support the obligation. Enter the title and description of the attachment, put a date, and save
the document.
Step 14. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the BCUV. Take note of the
Voucher ID number.
Step 15. Go to Transition field on top of the form. Select the appropriate action and click on
the transition button.
The obligation will be routed to the two levels of approval. The approval sequence starts with
the Budget Division Chief, and finally the Director of Financial Services or the equivalent.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective BCUV
for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Budget Division which makes the
final review and approval of the obligation.
Step 6. Communicate the complete coding block to the concerned Payroll Unit or the Human
Resource Division.
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency, subjected to adjustments. Normally, the pay is charged to General
Admin and Support - General Management and Supervision – 1 0 00 00 1
00001 000
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The
system applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see its own
Organization Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
Overtime Pay – 5 01 02 130 01
Step 6. Click the Roll up Budget Information button to view the Budget Control of the
coding block.
Note to the User: The budget information on the selected UACS coding block
should display complete data on Appropriations and Allotment, otherwise the
Obligation would not be successful.
Step 7. Click New button under Distribution Tab. Put all the field information (Fiscal
Year, Fiscal Period, Amount (Domestic). If the Obligation is for multiple periods, user needs
to enter multiple distribution.
Step 8. Click on Save and Return button to save the Obligation item and to go back
to the Obligation main screen. For transactions involving several items, repeat Steps 5, 6, and
7 to input the others.
Step 9. Click on the Attachment Tab to attach supporting
documents. As much as possible, scan in pdf format and upload the Payroll Summary to
support the obligation. Enter the title and description of the attachment, put a date, and save
the document.
Step 10. Press the save button , and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the Obligation has been created.
Step 11. Once the Obligation is created and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Obligation for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Budget Division which makes the
final review and approval of the obligation.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Due to Officers and Employees – 2 01 01 020 00
Step 7. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 8. Click on Import Obligation Item button at the lowest icon panel to import the
approved ObR created for the payroll disbursement. System will open Obligation Item screen
to find the related obligation.
Note to the User: Unless the Budget Division Chief finally approves the related
ObR, it would not display in the list.
Step 9. Enter the ObR number in the ID field, if known. If not, click the Lookup and
Search buttons to display the list of approved ObRs. Then select the specific ObR for
this disbursement.
Step 10. The system will automatically carry forward to the DV form all the obligation items.
Step 11. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Note to the user: In case of partial payment or installment payment, user can
click on the default created payment detail and modify/change it and can add
another payment detail by clicking new button under Payment Detail Tab.
Remember that total amount defined in Payment detail and total amount of DV
line item must be equal.
Step 12. Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and Return
button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 13. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
The following are the required supporting documents for Payroll disbursements:
1. Overtime and Night Pay
a. Overtime authority with pay stating the necessity and urgency of the work to be
done, and the duration of overtime work
b. Approved Authority to Render Specific Overtime Job/Service to be prepared
daily
c. Daily Time Record
d. Statement of overtime services duly verified by HRD
e. Report on Overtime Services Rendered
f. Certificate of handwritten entries (for assigned drivers of officials, when
necessary)
g. Justification for rendering overnight work
h. Pass slips / Office Order / Attendance Blotters / Certificate of Attendance (if
necessary)
These supporting documents should be scanned in pdf format to be uploaded as attachment
in the system.
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
The control objective is to ensure that cash and non-cash transactions relating to MOOE are
brought to account in a timely and correct manner.
Those MOOE incurred through purchase are discussed separately in the Processes relating
to Purchases (Section 3.2.3).
Petty Cash is held in perpetuity or until it is no longer required whereas Advances to Special
Disbursing Officers are made for specific operational purposes and will have a finite duration,
and Advances to Officers and Employees are generally used as advances for their travel and
subsistence on missions outside their main offices. The related expenditures constitute
payments out of cash advances granted to regular/special disbursing officers or custodians to
defray MOOE.
The Petty Cash Custodian or Disbursing Officer or traveling employee, as the Creator, should
first prepare the Obligation through the system following the steps below:
Step 2. By default, obligation will open in Search mode. To create new obligation, click on New
button.
Step 3. Obligation screen will open in Insert mode. Enter all required information, such as
Vendor, Transaction Description, Amount, UACS Coding Block, and Item Description.
Step 4. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to the dropdown list. Select the
specific name of the Custodian, Disbursing Officer, or the respective Vendor-Employee.
Step 5. Click the Elements View button to select the UACS code from the list, as
described below, then click the Save and Return button when all coding blocks are selected.
Fund Source
General Maintenance and Other Operating Expenditures are normally charged to
General Fund, Specific Budget of Agency – 01 1 01 101
Note to the User: Prepare separate ObR for each Fund Source.
PAP
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency. Normally, the PCF is charged to General Admin and Support - General
Management and Supervision – 1 0 00 00 1 00001 000, unless otherwise.
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The system
applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see its own Organization
Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
For expenditures, these include all the MOOE Items that start with 502xxxxxxx. These
items can be seen in detail in the dropdown lists, and may include any of the following:
Traveling Expenses-Local – 5 02 01 010 00
Traveling Expenses-Foreign – 5 02 01 020 00
Training Expenses – 5 02 02 010 00
Scholarship Grants/Expenses – 5 02 02 020 00
Awards/Rewards Expenses – 5 02 06 010 01
Rewards and Incentives – 5 02 06 010 02
Other Supplies and Materials Expenses – 5 02 03 990 00
Representation Expenses – 5 02 99 030 00
Transportation and Delivery Expenses – 5 02 99 040 00
Other Maintenance and Operating Expenses – 5 02 99 990 02
Note to the User: There is a need to specify the MOOE items to fall under the
Petty Cash Fund to push for the approval. Just select any anticipated expense
items; the actual expenses would be recognized during replenishment and final
liquidation.
Step 6. Click the Roll up Budget Information button to view the Budget Control of the
coding block.
Note to the User: The budget information on the selected UACS coding block
should display complete data on Appropriations and Allotment, otherwise the
Obligation would not be successful.
Step 7. Click New button under Distribution Tab. Put all the field information (Fiscal
Year, Fiscal Period, Amount (Domestic). If the Obligation is for multiple periods, user needs
to enter multiple distribution.
Step 8. Click on Save and Return button to save the Obligation item and to go back
to the Obligation main screen. For transactions involving several items, repeat Steps 5, 6, and
7 to input the others.
Step 9. Click on the Attachment Tab to attach supporting
documents. As much as possible, scan in pdf format and upload in the system to support the
obligation. Enter the title and description of the attachment, put a date, and save the document.
Step 10. Press the save button , and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the Obligation has been created.
Step 11. Once the Obligation is created and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
The obligation will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the
Employee, Disbursing Officer or Custodian’s immediate Supervisor or the Head of BSO he/she
belongs. This will then be forwarded to the Budget Division Processor for review, and finally
the Budget Division Chief for approval.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Obligation for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Budget Division which makes the
final review and approval of the obligation.
4.2.1.1.3 Preparation of DV
The Creator (traveling employee, designated Disbursing Officer or the Petty Cash Custodian)
should follow the steps below to create DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Due to Officers and Employees – 2 01 01 020 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 01 01 020 00 – Petty Cash Fund
1 99 01 010 00 – Advances for Operating Expenses
1 99 01 030 00 – Advances to Special Disbursing Officers
1 99 01 040 00 – Advances to Officers and Employees
Step 11. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Sub-ledger
codes, and then look for the specific name of the authorized Disbursing Officer to choose.
Step 12. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 13. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 14. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 15. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
4.2.1.1.4 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the
Employee, Disbursing Officer or Custodian’s immediate Supervisor or the Head of BSO he/she
belongs. This will then be forwarded to the Accounting Division Processor for review, then to
the Accounting Division Chief for approval, and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the
payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The Petty Cash Custodian, as the Creator, should prepare first the Obligation through the
system following the steps below:
Step 8. Click on Save and Return button to save the Obligation item and to go back
to the Obligation main screen. For transactions involving several items, repeat Steps 5, 6, and
7 to input the others.
Step 9. Click on the Attachment Tab to attach supporting
documents. As much as possible, scan in pdf format and upload in the system to support the
obligation. Enter the title and description of the attachment, put a date, and save the document.
Step 10. Press the save button , and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the Obligation has been created.
Step 11. Once the Obligation is created and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
The obligation will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the
Custodian’s immediate Supervisor or the Head of BSO he/she belongs. This will then be
forwarded to the Budget Division Processor for review, and finally the Budget Division Chief
for approval.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Obligation for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Budget Division which makes the
final review and approval of the obligation.
4.2.1.2.3 Preparation of DV
The Creator or the Petty Cash Custodian should follow the steps below to create DV, which
would be linked to corresponding ObR for this replenishment:
the list. Then look for the specific name of the responsible Petty Cash Custodian.
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the TBA, and then
select the appropriate bank account from the list, example:
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Funding Source Description
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by ADA;
001-001 510-5 (ADA) Disb under
General Fund-
New Gen Appro,
NGA Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Due to Officers and Employees – 2 01 01 020 00
Step 7. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 8. Click on Import Obligation Item button at the lowest icon panel to import the
approved ObR created for the replenishment. System will open Obligation Item screen to find
the related obligation.
Note to the User: Unless the Budget Division Chief finally approves the related
ObR, it would not display in the list.
Step 9. Enter the ObR number in the ID field, if known. If not, click the Lookup and
Search buttons to display the list of approved ObRs. Then select the specific ObR for
this replenishment. The system will automatically carry forward to the DV form all the obligation
items, including the MOOE accounts.
Step 10. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 11. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 12. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 13. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 14. Once the DV is created and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
4.2.1.2.4 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the
Custodian’s immediate Supervisor or the Head of BSO he/she belongs. This will then be
forwarded to the Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division
Chief for approval, and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
This process and procedure also includes the closing of Petty Cash Fund. There are instances
that a government agency chooses to periodically close the Petty Cash Fund, which normally
occurs at the end of each year.
The concerned government employee, or the authorized Disbursing Officer, or the Petty Cash
Custodian should prepare the Liquidation Report (LR) with supporting documents, and submit
them to the Accounting Division.
The Accounting Officer should then process review the LRs and record the liquidation of
Advances in BTMS through creation of JEV.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► JEV. By default, users
will be in Search Mode.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the JEV Item, browse down and look for the Obligation field.
Step 6. Click the Lookup button and enter the Obligation ID number, if known. Or click
the Lookup and Search buttons to select the ObR from the list corresponding
to the payroll advances. Once the ObR is chosen, the system automatically fills out the correct
UACS Coding Block and debit amount fields.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full coding block used
in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 01 01 020 00 – Petty Cash Fund
1 99 01 010 00 – Advances for Operating Expenses
1 99 01 030 00 – Advances to Special Disbursing Officers
1 99 01 040 00 – Advances to Officers and Employees
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV. A window appears
to confirm the new JEV creation.
Step 13. Once the JEV is created and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
The JEV will be routed to the Accounting Division Chief for approval. Once the document/form
is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about the assignment. This
would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The
Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
The following are the required supporting documents for Accountable Advances and its
liquidations:
i. Document to show the foreign exchange rate at the date of grant of cash
advance per BSP issuance (in case of foreign travel)
j. Flight itinerary issued by the airline/ticketing office/travel agency
The Creator should prepare first the Obligation through the system following the steps below:
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Obligation for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Budget Division which makes the
final review and approval of the obligation.
4.2.2.3 Preparation of DV
The Creator of the RC or requesting unit should follow the steps below to create DV, which
would be linked to corresponding ObR for this replenishment:
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 7. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 8. Click on Import Obligation Item button at the lowest icon panel to import the
approved ObR created for the replenishment. System will open Obligation Item screen to find
the related obligation.
Note to the User: Unless the Budget Division Chief finally approves the related
ObR, it would not display in the list.
Step 9. Enter the ObR number in the ID field, if known. If not, click the Lookup and
Search buttons to display the list of approved ObRs. Then select the specific ObR for
this replenishment. The system will automatically carry forward to the DV form all the obligation
items, including the MOOE accounts.
Step 10. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 11. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 12. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 13. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 14. Once the DV is created and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
4.2.2.4 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the Head of BSO he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
for official travel exceeded the prescribed rate per day (certification or affidavit
of loss shall not be considered as an appropriate replacement for the required
hotel/lodging and receipts)
k. Reimbursement Expense Receipt (RER)
l. Certificate of Appearance/Attendance
m. Certificate of Travel Completed
5. Representation Expenses
8. Miscellaneous Expenses
a. Official Receipts and/or other documents in evidencing disbursement, if there
are available, or in lieu thereof, certification executed by the official concerned
that the expense sought to be reimbursed have been incurred for any of the
purposes contemplated under the provisions of the GAA in relation to or by
reasons of his position
3. Payment of Water
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020401000/** – Water Expenses
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
4. Payment of Electricity
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020402000/** – Electricity Expenses
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
5. Payment of Telephone
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020502001/** – Telephone Expenses –
Mobile
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020502002/** – Telephone Expenses –
Landline
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
9. Payment of Insurance
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5021503000/** – Insurance Expenses
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
1. As per Annual Procurement Plan (APP) and/or Project Procurement Management Plan
(PPMP)
Procurement of goods and services shall be based on an approved APP. The PPMP
on the other hand contains information on whether the program, activity, and project
(PAP) will be contracted out and submitted to the Bids and Awards Committee for
consolidation in the APP.
Purchase transactions are made in two ways: through the Procurement Service and direct
through the Vendors.
For the actual requisition of supplies from the Procurement Service, its standard operating
procedures shall be followed, which is outside of BTMS coverage. To record the same in
BTMS, the transactions shall begin with the preparation of PR based on the approved Agency
Procurement Request (APR).
Property and Supply Officer/s or the equivalent is responsible for the commitment and
obligation related to purchase of supplies and materials from Procurement Service. The
designated Creator shall follow the steps below:
from the dropdown list the applicable values for the coding blocks.
Fund Source
Office Supplies and Materials are normally charged to General Fund, Specific Budget
of Agency – 01 1 01 101
Note to the User: Prepare separate ObR for each Fund Source.
PAP
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency. Normally, the Office Supplies and Materials is charged to General Admin and
Support - General Management and Supervision – 1 0 00 00 1 00001 000, unless
otherwise.
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The system
applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see its own Organization
Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
For expenditures, these include all the MOOE Items that start with 502xxxxxxx. These
items can be seen in detail in the dropdown lists, and may include any of the following:
Office Supplies Expenses – 5 02 03 010 00
Accountable Forms Expenses – 5 02 03 020 00
Drugs and Medicines Expenses– 5 02 03 070 00
Medical, Dental and Laboratory Supplies Expenses – 5 02 03 080 00
Other Supplies and Materials Expenses – 5 02 03 990 00
Step 13. Click the Save and Return button when all coding blocks are selected.
Step 14. To check if the chosen coding block has adequate budget cover, click the Roll up
Budget Information button . Click on the (x) to return to the Catalogue Item screen.
Note to the User: Budget information, particularly Appropriations and
Allotments, on the UACS selected will be displayed. In case no rollup
information is displayed or the rollup information only shows MDP and Cash
Allocation, it means that there’s no budget for the selected coding block.
Step 15. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 16. Click on the Suggested Vendors Tab .
Note to the User: Completion of this information is applicable only when
vendor is known.
Step 17. Add a vendor by clicking on the buttons lookup . Select Procurement
Service from the Vendor list.
Step 18. Input the Justification. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR
screen.
Step 19. Click on the Attachment Tab
Step 20. To add an attachment, click the New button . Input the Attachment title, and
the description of the attachment.
Note to the User: Refer to the list of documentary requirements as the required
supporting documents.
Step 21. Select “Browse” to attach the file, primarily the scanned (pdf) copy of the APR. Put
the document date in the date field.
Step 22. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 23. Once all required fields and tabs are complete, click on the Save button to
save the PR. A message is displayed saying that the PR is successfully created.
Step 24. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 25. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.1.2 Approval of PR
The BTMS solution has built in control features; the system will check for the availability of
budgets for the purchase. If there is no budget, then it will not allow the Creator to save the
PR and request for approval. Relative to this, the Users from Procurement or Budget Division,
whichever handles the final and approved APP, will review, verify and approve the PR. The
final approval of PR by the Procurement Management Division Chief or the equivalent certifies
the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers the automatic creation of commitment to
set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
In this case, procurement process is considered done by the Procurement Service. So, the
Vendor to which the purchase will be made is already identified.
The PO is a form or document used by NGA to purchase goods or services. The document
is addressed to a supplier, in this case the Procurement Service, to deliver specific quantities
of supplies, goods or property, subject to terms and conditions contained in the PO.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies. The designated Creator shall follow the
steps below:
Step 4. To attach PRs to the PO, Click the Add button on the Attached Requisitions
field.
Step 5. In the PR field, click on the Look up and Search button to allow you to
choose the PR from the list. Once selected, the item will be listed under PRs Item.
Note to the User: User can select multiple PRs for a single PO provided they
are due to the same Vendor.
Step 6. Fill out the Comments field to provide additional information related to the selected
PR.
Step 7. On the PR Items screen, check the Select tickbox to assign items that will be
purchased or ordered.
Note to the User: Notice that the Assign tickbox on the right side automatically
populates.
Step 8. Click the Assign Requisition Items button and Save and Return button
to go back to the main PO screen.
Step 9. Click on the PO Item tab to input necessary details. The details of the PR will be
carried forward to the PO Items. You can select the PO item and update it, as needed.
Step 10. In the PO Item Drops tab, update details on Delivery Date From, Delivery Date To,
and Quantity.
Step 11. Click the Save and Return button to return to the PO Item Screen.
Step 12. Click on the Attachments Tab to attach supporting files, photos, and scanned copies
of documents related to the PO.
Step 13. Click on the Update and Return button to return to the PO Screen.
Step 14. After entering all the necessary information related to the PO, proceed
to saving the PO by clicking the Save button. A message is displayed saying that the
PR is successfully created.
Step 15. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.1.4 Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent.
The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget Division Chief or the
equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the availability of budget
cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is the Administrative
Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing units. The final approval of the PO will
automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
4.2.3.1.5 Preparation of DV
The Creator from the PSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 03 03 010 00 – Due from National Government Agencies
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 15. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.1.6 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
‘Receive’
Step 4. To enter the details of the actual delivery, click New button under
Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab. A new window will open to enter the note
details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number entered in the Header will be copied. Select the PO
item and the details will be copied as well on the related fields of the screen.
Step 6. Update all mandatory fields and other necessary fields: Quantity Received and
Amount.
Step 7. Click the Save and Return button to return to the GRN screen.
Step 8. Add the scanned copy of the Inspection and Acceptance Report (IAR) as an
attachment. After entering all the necessary information related to the Goods Receive Note,
you can now proceed to saving the Receive Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
There are two important roles here, the Creator and the Approver. Once goods, property or
services are delivered by Procurement Service and received by the agency, the PSD or the
equivalent will need to create Goods Receipt Notes. Then the Division Chief will approve the
note through the system.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
The Accounting Officer should then process review of the GRN and record the liquidation of
Advances to Procurement Service in BTMS through creation of JEV.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
The Accounting Officer should then process review of the GRN and record the liquidation of
Advances to Procurement Service in BTMS through creation of JEV.
All inventoriable items are accounted for using asset method pursuant to Government
Accounting Manual prescribed by COA. Based on the delivery from Procurement Service
which GRN is prepared and approved, the Accounting Division shall prepare adjusting JEV to
consider all goods received from Procurement Service as Inventories which UACS Object
coding starts with 104xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Over time, the supplies and materials inventory will be issued and consumed. The PSD or the
equivalent shall issue periodically (e.g. monthly) the Report of Supplies and Materials Issued
(RSMI).
Upon receipt of a copy of RSMI, the Accounting Division will prepare the JEV to properly
account for the expenses, which UACS Object coding will revert to 502xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
The JEVs will be routed to the Accounting Division Chief for approval. Once the
document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about the
assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the button
is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
equipment
f. Statement of Receipt and Issuance of Supplies and Materials (SRISM) (in the
case of expendable supplies)
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
The PR is a form used to request purchase of certain quantity of goods, such as supplies and
materials.
For items indicated in the APP and PPMP, the Property and Supply Officer/s or the equivalent
is responsible for the commitment and obligation related to purchase of supplies and materials.
For emergency purchases, it would be a function of the RC or BSO requesting the purchase
of the item/s, subject to some prerequisites. The transaction Creators and First-line Approvers
shall represent the requesting unit.
Note to the User: The PSD shall issue a Certification on No Stock Available
as a prerequisite for PR Approval.
to select the available method from the list. Input the code in the ID, if known, or click the Find
button to display the list.
Step 6. Click on the PR Item Tab
Step 7. To add the requisition items, click the New button under the tab attachments.
Step 8. On the Item screen, click the Look up button to select the Item for requisition.
Step 9. To select the item, click the search button to display the item catalogue for requisition.
Select the specific catalogue item from the list
Step 10. Input the empty values on the required fields: Unit Price and Quantity
Step 11. Type in the Description the complete specifications or requirements of the goods or
services to purchase.
Step 12. To select the UACS coding block, click on the Elements button. Then select
from the dropdown list the applicable values for the coding blocks.
Fund Source
Office Supplies and Materials are normally charged to General Fund, Specific Budget
of Agency – 01 1 01 101
Note to the User: Prepare separate ObR for each Fund Source.
PAP
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency. Normally, the Office Supplies and Materials is charged to General Admin and
Support - General Management and Supervision – 1 0 00 00 1 00001 000, unless
otherwise.
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The system
applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see its own Organization
Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
For expenditures, these include all the MOOE Items that start with 502xxxxxxx. These
items can be seen in detail in the dropdown lists, and may include any of the following:
Office Supplies Expenses – 5 02 03 010 00
Accountable Forms Expenses – 5 02 03 020 00
Drugs and Medicines Expenses– 5 02 03 070 00
Medical, Dental and Laboratory Supplies Expenses – 5 02 03 080 00
Fuel, Oil and Lubricants Expenses – 5 02 03 090 00
Other Supplies and Materials Expenses – 5 02 03 990 00
Step 13. Click the Save and Return button when all coding blocks are selected.
Step 14. To check if the chosen coding block has adequate budget cover, click the Roll up
Budget Information button . Click on the (x) to return to the Catalogue Item screen.
Note to the User: Budget information, particularly Appropriations and
Allotments, on the UACS selected will be displayed. In case no rollup
information is displayed or the rollup information only shows MDP and Cash
Allocation, it means that there’s no budget for the selected coding block.
Step 15. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 16. Click on the Attachment Tab
Step 17. To add an attachment, click the New button . Input the Attachment title, and
the description of the attachment.
Note to the User: Refer to the list of documentary requirements as the required
supporting documents.
Step 18. Select “Browse” to attach the file. Indicate the document date in the date field.
Step 19. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 20. Once all required fields and tabs are complete, click on the Save button to
save the PR. A message is displayed saying that the PR is successfully created.
Step 21. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 22. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.2.2 Approval of PR
All created PRs shall pass through review and approval. The Users from Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent, whichever handles the final and approved APP, will
review, verify and approve the PR. The final approval of PR by the Procurement Management
Division Chief or the equivalent certifies the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers
the automatic creation of commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies.
Note to the User: All Suppliers must be registered with Philippine Government
Electronic Procurement System (PhilGEPS). All other payees must be enrolled
in BTMS through the System Administrators. These are prerequisites to
preparation of PO and ObR.
4.2.3.2.4 Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is
the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing unit, the PMD. The final
approval of the PO will automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from
Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
There are two important roles here, the Creator and the Approver. Once goods, property or
services are delivered by Procurement Service and received by the agency, the PSD or the
equivalent will need to create Goods Receipt Notes. Then the Division Chief will approve the
note through the system.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
Note to the User: During the preparation of DV, only POs with GRNs are
eligible for payments. The disbursement amounts will be limited to the amount
of goods received.
4.2.3.2.7 Preparation of DV
The Creator from the PSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
1. VAT-Registered Suppliers
a. 1% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
2. Non-VAT Suppliers
a. 1% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 3% Percentage Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
12 and then click the Save and return icon .
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 17. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 18. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 19. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 20. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.2.8 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
All inventoriable items are accounted for using asset method pursuant to Government
Accounting Manual prescribed by COA. Based on the approved GRN, the Accounting Division
shall prepare adjusting JEV to consider all goods received from Suppliers as Inventories which
UACS Object coding starts with 104xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full coding block used
in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 04 04 010 00 – Office Supplies Inventory
1 04 04 020 00 – Accountable Forms, Plates and Stickers Inventory
1 04 04 060 00 – Drugs and Medicines Inventory
1 04 04 070 00 – Medical, Dental and Laboratory Supplies Inventory
1 04 04 080 00 – Fuel, Oil and Lubricants Inventory
1 04 04 990 00 – Other Supplies and Materials Inventory
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full coding block used
in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (as originally coded in PR)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: (as originally coded in PR)
Object Code: 5 02 03 010 00 – Office Supplies Expenses
5 02 03 020 00 – Accountable Forms Expenses
5 02 03 070 00 – Drugs and Medicines Expenses
5 02 03 080 00 – Medical, Dental and Laboratory Supplies
Expenses
5 02 03 090 00 – Fuel, Oil and Lubricants Expenses
5 02 03 990 00 – Other Supplies and Materials Expenses
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Note to the User: The adjustment is required to close the expense accounts
which are not yet actually consumed. The expensing will have to be based on
the Report of Supplies and Materials Issued (RSMI) from the PSD or the
equivalent. Refer to section 1.1.3.1.10 below.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV. A window appears
to confirm the new JEV creation.
Over time, the supplies and materials inventory will be issued and consumed. The PSD or the
equivalent shall issue periodically (e.g. monthly) the Report of Supplies and Materials Issued
(RSMI).
Upon receipt of a copy of RSMI, the Accounting Division will prepare the JEV to properly
account for the expenses, which UACS Object coding will revert to 502xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
The JEVs will be routed to the Accounting Division Chief for approval. Once the
document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about the
assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the button
is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
4.2.3.3.1 Preparation of PR
The PR is the same form used to request for the purchase of certain service. For items
indicated in the APP and PPMP, the General Services Division (GSD) or the equivalent is
responsible for the commitment and obligation related to purchase of services. The transaction
Creators and First-line Approvers shall represent the requesting unit.
4.2.3.3.2 Approval of PR
All created PRs shall pass through review and approval. The Users from Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent, whichever handles the final and approved APP, will
review, verify and approve the PR. The final approval of PR by the Procurement Management
Division Chief or the equivalent certifies the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers
the automatic creation of commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task first to his/her immediate Supervisor. This would trigger a pending task for the next line
approver until fully approved. Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage
as described above, the steps below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
4.2.3.3.3 Preparation of PO
The PO is a form or document used by agency to purchase services. After observance of the
procurement guidelines per RA 9184, which is outside of BTMS, and once the supplier/s is
known, the preparation of PO will be done through the system. The PO is addressed to a
Supplier to order and deliver specific quality of service, subject to terms and conditions
contained in the document.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies.
Note to the User: All Suppliers must be registered with PhilGEPS. All other
payees must be enrolled in BTMS through the System Administrators. These
are prerequisites to preparation of PO and ObR.
Step 15. Once the PO is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.3.4 Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is
the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing unit, the PMD. The final
approval of the PO will automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from
Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Step 6. Update all mandatory fields and other necessary fields: Quantity Received and
Amount.
Step 7. Click the Save and Return button to return to the GRN screen.
Step 8. Add the scanned copy of the Inspection and Acceptance Report (IAR) as an
attachment. After entering all the necessary information related to the Goods Receive Note,
you can now proceed to saving the Receive Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the GRN is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
There are two important roles here, the Creator and the Approver. Once services are delivered
by Suppliers and received by the agency, the GSD or the equivalent will need to create Goods
Receipt Notes. Then the Division Chief will approve the note through the system.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
Note to the User: During the preparation of DV, only POs with GRNs are
eligible for payments. The disbursement amounts will be limited to the amount
of goods received.
4.2.3.3.7 Preparation of DV
The Creator from the GSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Note to the User: Make sure that the GRN is approved against this PO.
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to select the specific Vendor from
the list.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the TBA, and then
select the appropriate bank account from the list, example:
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Funding Source Description
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by ADA;
001-001 510-5 (ADA) Disb under
General Fund-
New Gen Appro,
NGA Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
1. VAT-Registered Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
2. Non-VAT Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 3% Percentage Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
12 and then click the Save and return icon .
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 17. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 18. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 19. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 20. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.3.8 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
2. Payment of Representation
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5029903000/** – Representation
Expenses
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020101000/** – Due to BIR
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
3. Payment of Subscription
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5029907000/** – Subscription Expenses
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020101000/** – Due to BIR
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
4. Payment of Advertisement
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5029901000/** – Advertising Expenses
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2020101000/** – Due to BIR
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/2010101000/** – Accounts Payable
(offset code)
Most of the Professional Services however are contracted individually. So, PR, PO and GRN
preparations are no longer necessary unless contracted to a firm, in which case, process and
procedures in Section 3.2.3.3 shall apply.
Two User Roles are primarily involved in the process: the Creator, the designated Admin
Officer of each requesting unit, who creates Obligation and DV, and the First-Line Approver
who is the immediate supervisor or Head of the BSO who certifies the transactions. Users
need to log in to the system and transact creation of ObR and DV.
The Creator should prepare first the Obligation through the system following the steps below:
Step 11. Once the Obligation is created and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 12. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
The obligation will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the
Creator’s immediate Supervisor or the Head of BSO he/she belongs. This will then be
forwarded to the Budget Division Processor for review, and finally the Budget Division Chief
for approval.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Obligation for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction.
Step 20. Enter a Step Note on Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or
corrections are required. Then, click on Finish .
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Budget Division which makes the
final review and approval of the obligation.
4.2.3.4.3 Preparation of DV
The Creator from the respective requesting unit or the Creator of the ObR should follow the
steps below to create DV:
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 7. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 8. Click on Import Obligation Item button at the lowest icon panel to import the
approved ObR created for the replenishment. System will open Obligation Item screen to find
the related obligation.
Note to the User: Unless the Budget Division Chief finally approves the related
ObR, it would not display in the list.
Step 9. Enter the ObR number in the ID field, if known. If not, click the Lookup and
Search buttons to display the list of approved ObRs. Then select the specific ObR for
this replenishment. The system will automatically carry forward to the DV form all the obligation
items, including the MOOE accounts.
Step 10. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 11. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 12. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
1. Professionals with Annual Gross Income of P720,000 and above
a. 15% Withholding Tax
2. Professionals with Annual Gross Income less than P720,000
a. 10% Withholding Tax
Step 13. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 17. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 18. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 19. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 20. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.4.4 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required. Then, click on Finish
button.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
The following are the required supporting documents for Accountable Advances and its
liquidations:
2. Legal Services
a. Office Order (if necessary)
b. Copy of documents, if applicable
c. Justification for the incurrence of the expense, if applicable
d. Official Receipt (in case of reimbursement and for post-audit activities)
3. Consultancy Services
a. Office Order (if necessary)
b. Authenticated photocopy of the approved Annual Procurement Plan (APP) and
any amendment thereto
c. Contract/Memorandum of Agreement
d. Notice of Award, Notice to Proceed and all bidding documents (in case of
corporate consultancy services)
e. Copy of curriculum vitae (in case of individual engagements)
f. Certificate of Acceptance of services/deliverables in accordance with the terms
and condition of the Contract/MOA (in case of final payment)
g. Such other documents/deliverables contained in the Contract/MOA
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
4.2.3.5.1 Preparation of PR
The PR is the same form used to request for the purchase of certain service. For items
indicated in the APP and PPMP, the General Services Division (GSD) or the equivalent is
responsible for the commitment and obligation related to purchase of services. For emergency
repairs and maintenance, it would be a function of the RC or BSO requesting the purchase of
the item/s, subject to prerequisites established by the Admin Service. The transaction Creators
and First-line Approvers shall represent the requesting unit.
Note to the User: The General Services-Maintenance Division shall issue a
Pre-Inspection Report as a prerequisite for PR Approval. For motor vehicles,
the General Services-Motorpool Division shall issue the Pre-Inspection Report.
4.2.3.5.2 Approval of PR
All created PRs shall pass through review and approval. The Users from Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent, whichever handles the final and approved APP, will
review, verify and approve the PR. The final approval of PR by the Procurement Management
Division Chief or the equivalent certifies the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers
the automatic creation of commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task first to his/her immediate Supervisor. This would trigger a pending task for the next line
approver until fully approved. Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage
as described above, the steps below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
4.2.3.5.3 Preparation of PO
The PO is a form or document used by agency to purchase services. After observance of the
procurement guidelines per RA 9184, which is outside of BTMS, and once the supplier/s is
known, the preparation of PO will be done through the system. The PO is addressed to a
Supplier to order and deliver specific quality of service, subject to terms and conditions
contained in the document.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies.
Note to the User: All Suppliers must be registered with PhilGEPS. All other
payees must be enrolled in BTMS through the System Administrators. These
are prerequisites to preparation of PO and ObR.
carried forward to the PO Items. You can select the PO item and update it, as needed.
Step 10. In the PO Item Drops tab, update details on Delivery Date From, Delivery Date To,
and Quantity.
Step 11. Click the Save and Return button to return to the PO Item Screen.
Step 12. Click on the Attachments Tab to attach supporting files, photos, and scanned copies
of documents related to the PO.
Step 13. Click on the Update and Return button to return to the PO Screen.
Step 14. After entering all the necessary information related to the PO, proceed to saving the
PO by clicking the Save button. A message is displayed saying that the PR is
successfully created.
Step 15. Once the PO is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.5.4 Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is
the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing unit, the PMD. The final
approval of the PO will automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from
Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Receive Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Select the corresponding PO and all the mandatory fields (*) shall be populated.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Receipt note, make sure to select
‘Receive’
Step 4. To enter the details of the actual delivery, click New button under
Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab. A new window will open to enter the note
details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number entered in the Header will be copied. Select the PO
item and the details will be copied as well on the related fields of the screen.
Step 6. Update all mandatory fields and other necessary fields: Quantity Received and
Amount.
Step 7. Click the Save and Return button to return to the GRN screen.
Step 8. Add the scanned copy of the Inspection and Acceptance Report (IAR) as an
attachment. After entering all the necessary information related to the Goods Receive Note,
you can now proceed to saving the Receive Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the GRN is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
There are two important roles here, the Creator and the Approver. Once services are delivered
by Suppliers and received by the agency, the GSD or the equivalent will need to create Goods
Receipt Notes. Then the Division Chief will approve the note through the system.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
Note to the User: During the preparation of DV, only POs with GRNs are
eligible for payments. The disbursement amounts will be limited to the amount
of goods received.
4.2.3.5.7 Preparation of DV
The Creator from the GSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
1. VAT-Registered Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
2. Non-VAT Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 3% Percentage Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
12 and then click the Save and return icon .
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 17. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 18. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 19. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 20. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.2.3.5.8 Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
The following are the required supporting documents for Accountable Advances and its
liquidations:
1. Pre-Inspection Report from General Services-Maintenance Division
2. Pre-Inspection Report from General Services-Motorpool Division (for motor vehicles)
3. Repair history of equipment
4. Quotation of at least three (3) contractors or Certificate of Exclusive Distributorship or
Certificate of Emergency Repair, if applicable
5. Job Estimate
6. Abstract of Quotations
7. Warranty Certificate
8. Police Report (in case of vehicular accident)
9. Statement of Account/Service Billing/Invoice
10. Inspection and Acceptance Report
11. Waste Materials Report
12. Statement of Receipt and Issuance of Supplies and Materials (SRISM)
13. Official Receipt (in case of reimbursement and for post-audit activities)
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
The control objective is to ensure that cash and non-cash transactions relating to MOOE are
brought to account in a timely and correct manner.
All common-used goods, including all semi-expendable machinery and equipment, furniture,
fixtures and books, are acquired through the Procurement Service pursuant to DBM Circular
Letter No. 2011-6 dated 25 August 2011. The payment shall be made directly to the
Procurement Service in the form of cash advance.
4.3.1.1Preparation of PR
For the actual requisition of properties from the Procurement Service, its standard operating
procedures shall be followed, which is outside of BTMS coverage. To record the same in
BTMS, the transactions shall begin with the preparation of PR based on the approved Agency
Procurement Request (APR).
Property and Supply Officer/s or the equivalent is responsible for the commitment and
obligation related to purchase of supplies and materials from Procurement Service. The
designated Creator shall follow the steps below:
2 specify sub-object codes for each asset class undergoing repairs and maintenance
Step 13. Click the Save and Return button when all coding blocks are selected.
Step 14. To check if the chosen coding block has adequate budget cover, click the Roll up
Budget Information button . Click on the (x) to return to the Catalogue Item screen.
Note to the User: Budget information, particularly Appropriations and
Allotments, on the UACS selected will be displayed. In case no rollup
information is displayed or the rollup information only shows MDP and Cash
Allocation, it means that there’s no budget for the selected coding block.
Step 15. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 16. Click on the Suggested Vendors Tab .
Note to the User: Completion of this information is applicable only when
vendor is known.
Step 17. Add a vendor by clicking on the buttons lookup . Select Procurement
Service from the Vendor list.
Step 18. Input the Justification. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR
screen.
Step 19. Click on the Attachment Tab
Step 20. To add an attachment, click the New button . Input the Attachment title, and
the description of the attachment.
Note to the User: Refer to the list of documentary requirements as the required
supporting documents.
Step 21. Select “Browse” to attach the file, primarily the scanned (pdf) copy of the APR. Put
the document date in the date field.
Step 22. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 23. Once all required fields and tabs are complete, click on the Save button to
save the PR. A message is displayed saying that the PR is successfully created.
Step 24. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 25. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.3.1.2Approval of PR
The BTMS solution has built in control features; the system will check for the availability of
budgets for the purchase. If there is no budget, then it will not allow the Creator to save the
PR and request for approval. Relative to this, the Users from Procurement or Budget Division,
whichever handles the final and approved APP, will review, verify and approve the PR. The
final approval of PR by the Procurement Management Division Chief or the equivalent certifies
the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers the automatic creation of commitment to
set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
The PO is a form or document used by NGA to purchase goods or services. The document is
addressed to a supplier, in this case the Procurement Service, to deliver specific quantities of
supplies, goods or property, subject to terms and conditions contained in the PO.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies. The designated Creator shall follow the
steps below:
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.3.1.4Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent.
The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget Division Chief or the
equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the availability of budget
cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is the Administrative
Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing units. The final approval of the PO will
automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
4.3.1.5Preparation of DV
The Creator from the PSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Funding
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Description
Source
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001 510-5 (ADA) ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 03 03 010 00 – Due from National Government Agencies
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 15. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.3.1.6Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
All inventoriable items are accounted for using asset method pursuant to Government
Accounting Manual prescribed by COA. Based on the delivery from Procurement Service
which GRN is prepared and approved, the Accounting Division shall prepare adjusting JEV to
consider all goods received from Procurement Service as Inventories which UACS Object
coding starts with 104xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Upon receipt of a copy of RSMI, the Accounting Division will prepare the JEV to properly
account for the expenses, which UACS Object coding will revert to 502xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020322001/** – Semi-Expendable
Furniture, Fixtures and Books Expenses -Furniture and
Fixtures
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020321099/** – Semi-Expendable
Furniture, Fixtures and Books Expenses -Books
For items indicated in the APP and PPMP, the Property and Supply Officer/s or the equivalent
is responsible for the commitment and obligation related to purchase of supplies and materials.
For emergency purchases, it would be a function of the RC or BSO requesting the purchase
of the item/s. The transaction Creators and First-line Approvers shall represent the requesting
unit.
4.3.2.2Approval of PR
All created PRs shall pass through review and approval. The Users from Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent, whichever handles the final and approved APP, will
review, verify and approve the PR. The final approval of PR by the Procurement Management
Division Chief or the equivalent certifies the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers
the automatic creation of commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies.
Note to the User: All Suppliers must be registered with PhilGEPS. All other
payees must be enrolled in BTMS through the System Administrators. These
are prerequisites to preparation of PO and ObR.
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.3.2.4Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is
the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing unit, the PMD. The final
approval of the PO will automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from
Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Amount.
Step 7. Click the Save and Return button to return to the GRN screen.
Step 8. Add the scanned copy of the Inspection and Acceptance Report (IAR) as an
attachment. After entering all the necessary information related to the Goods Receive Note,
you can now proceed to saving the Receive Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
4.3.2.7Preparation of DV
The Creator from the PSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
3. VAT-Registered Suppliers
a. 1% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
4. Non-VAT Suppliers
a. 1% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 3% Percentage Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
12 and then click the Save and return icon .
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 17. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 18. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 19. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 20. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.3.2.8Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Object Code:
o Semi-Expendable Machinery and Equipment Expenses – 5 02 03 210 00
Machinery – 5 02 03 210 01
Office Equipment – 5 02 03 210 02
ICT Equipment – 5 02 03 210 03
Communications Equipment – 5 02 03 210 07
Other Machinery and Equipment – 5 02 03 210 99
o Semi-Expendable Furniture, Fixtures and Books Expenses – 5 02 03 220
00
Furniture and Fixtures – 5 02 03 220 01
Books – 5 02 03 220 02
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Note to the User: The adjustment is required to close the expense accounts
which are not yet actually consumed. The expensing will have to be based on
the Report of Supplies and Materials Issued (RSMI) from the PSD or the
equivalent. Refer to section 1.1.3.1.10 below.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV. A window appears
to confirm the new JEV creation.
Upon receipt of a copy of RSMI, the Accounting Division will prepare the JEV to properly
account for the expenses, which UACS Object coding will revert to 502xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 6. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full coding block used
in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (examples)
1 04 05 010 00 – Semi-Expendable Machinery
1 04 05 020 00 – Semi-Expendable Office Equipment
1 04 05 030 00 – Semi-Expendable ICT Equipment
1 04 05 070 00 – Semi-Expendable Communications Equipment
1 04 05 190 00 – Semi-Expendable Other Machinery and Equipment
1 04 06 010 00 – Semi-Expendable Furniture and Fixtures
1 04 06 020 00 – Semi-Expendable Books
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV. A window appears
to confirm the new JEV creation.
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020321007/** – Semi-Expendable
Machinery and Equipment Expenses -Communications
Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020321099/** – Semi-Expendable
Machinery and Equipment Expenses -Other Machinery
and Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020322001/** – Semi-Expendable
Furniture, Fixtures and Books Expenses -Furniture and Fixtures
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5020321099/** – Semi-Expendable
Furniture, Fixtures and Books Expenses -Books
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1040501000/** – Semi-Expendable
Machinery
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1040502000/** – Semi-Expendable Office
Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1040503000/** – Semi-Expendable ICT
Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1040507000/** – Semi-Expendable
Communications Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1040519000/** – Semi-Expendable Other
Machinery and Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1040601000/** – Semi-Expendable
Furniture and Fixtures
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1040602000/** – Semi-Expendable Books
4.3.3.1Preparation of PR
The PR is the same form used to request for the purchase of certain service. For items
indicated in the APP and PPMP, the General Services Division (GSD) or the equivalent is
responsible for the commitment and obligation related to purchase of services. For emergency
repairs and maintenance, it would be a function of the RC or BSO requesting the purchase of
the item/s, subject to prerequisites established by the Admin Service. The transaction Creators
and First-line Approvers shall represent the requesting unit.
Note to the User: The General Services-Maintenance Division shall issue a
Pre-Inspection Report as a prerequisite for PR Approval. For motor vehicles,
the General Services-Motorpool Division shall issue the Pre-Inspection Report.
Step 2. By default, PR screen will open in Search mode. To create a new PR, click on New
button.
Step 3. Populate all the mandatory fields with red asterisk (*). Some fields are automatically
filled out based on the log in credentials of the user.
Step 4. Populate the other fields as necessary; the Procurement Method and Description most
importantly.
Step 5. To select the applicable Procurement Method, click on the Look up Button
to select the available method from the list. Input the code in the ID, if known, or click the Find
button to display the list.
Note to the User: The threshold of “goods and services having an amount of
500,000.00 and above will be done through bidding process pursuant to
Government Procurement Act” shall be observed.
Step 6. Click on the PR Item Tab
Step 7. To add the requisition items, click the New button under the tab attachments.
Step 8. On the Item screen, click the Look up button to select the Item for requisition.
Step 9. To select the item, click the search button to display the item catalogue for requisition.
Select the specific catalogue item from the list
Step 10. Input the empty values on the required fields: Unit Price and Quantity
Step 11. Type in the Description the complete specifications or requirements of the goods or
services to purchase.
Step 12. To select the UACS coding block, click on the Elements button. Then select
from the dropdown list the applicable values for the coding blocks.
Fund Source
Repairs and Maintenance Expense are normally charged to General Fund, Specific
Budget of Agency – 01 1 01 101, unless otherwise specified
Note to the User: Prepare separate ObR for each Fund Source.
PAP
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency. Normally, the Security and Janitorial Services for example are charged to
General Admin and Support - General Management and Supervision – 1 0 00 00 1
00001 000. Specify the PAP Codes applicable to the type of purchase, especially when
charged to Support to Operations and Operations.
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The system
applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see its own Organization
Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
For expenditures, these include all the MOOE Items that start with 502xxxxxxx.
Repairs and Maintenance expenditure items are numerous and thus require specific
Sub-Object Codes. These items can be seen in detail in the dropdown lists, and may
include any of the following:
Repairs and Maintenance-Semi-Expendable Machinery and Equipment – 5 02 13
210 00
o Machinery – 5 02 13 210 01
o Office Equipment – 5 02 13 210 02
o ICT Equipment – 5 02 13 210 03
o Communication Equipment – 5 02 13 210 07
o Other Machinery and Equipment – 5 02 13 210 99
Repairs and Maintenance-Semi-Expendable Furniture, Fixtures and Books – 5 02
13 220 00
o Furniture and Fixture – 5 02 13 220 01
o Books – 5 02 13 220 02
Step 13. Click the Save and Return button when all coding blocks are selected.
Step 14. To check if the chosen coding block has adequate budget cover, click the Roll up
Budget Information button . Click on the (x) to return to the Catalogue Item screen.
Note to the User: Budget information, particularly Appropriations and
Allotments, on the UACS selected will be displayed. In case no rollup
information is displayed or the rollup information only shows MDP and Cash
Allocation, it means that there’s no budget for the selected coding block.
Step 15. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 16. Click on the Attachment Tab
Step 17. To add an attachment, click the New button . Input the Attachment title, and
the description of the attachment.
Note to the User: Refer to the list of documentary requirements as the required
supporting documents.
Step 18. Select “Browse” to attach the file. Indicate the document date in the date field.
Step 19. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 20. Once all required fields and tabs are complete, click on the Save button to
save the PR. A message is displayed saying that the PR is successfully created.
Step 21. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 22. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.3.3.2Approval of PR
All created PRs shall pass through review and approval. The Users from Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent, whichever handles the final and approved APP, will
review, verify and approve the PR. The final approval of PR by the Procurement Management
Division Chief or the equivalent certifies the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers
the automatic creation of commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task first to his/her immediate Supervisor. This would trigger a pending task for the next line
approver until fully approved. Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage
as described above, the steps below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
4.3.3.3Preparation of PO
The PO is a form or document used by agency to purchase services. After observance of the
procurement guidelines per RA 9184, which is outside of BTMS, and once the supplier/s is
known, the preparation of PO will be done through the system. The PO is addressed to a
Supplier to order and deliver specific quality of service, subject to terms and conditions
contained in the document.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies.
Note to the User: All Suppliers must be registered with PhilGEPS. All other
payees must be enrolled in BTMS through the System Administrators. These
are prerequisites to preparation of PO and ObR.
4.3.3.4Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is
the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing unit, the PMD. The final
approval of the PO will automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from
Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Step 8. Add the scanned copy of the Inspection and Acceptance Report (IAR) as an
attachment. After entering all the necessary information related to the Goods Receive Note,
you can now proceed to saving the Receive Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the GRN is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
Note to the User: During the preparation of DV, only POs with GRNs are
eligible for payments. The disbursement amounts will be limited to the amount
of goods received.
4.3.3.7Preparation of DV
The Creator from the GSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
1. VAT-Registered Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
2. Non-VAT Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 3% Percentage Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
12 and then click the Save and return icon .
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 17. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 18. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 19. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 20. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.3.3.8Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
3 specify sub-object codes for each asset class undergoing repairs and maintenance
For purchases made through the Procurement Service, the DV shall be prepared based on
the approved Agency Procurement Request (APR). The payment shall be made directly to the
Procurement Service in the form of cash advance.
All common-used goods (property and equipment) are acquired through the Procurement
Service pursuant to DBM Circular Letter No. 2011-6 dated 25 August 2011. The payment shall
be made directly to the Procurement Service in the form of cash advance.
4.4.1.1Preparation of PR
For the actual requisition of supplies from the Procurement Service, its standard operating
procedures shall be followed, which is outside of BTMS coverage. To record the same in
BTMS, the transactions shall begin with the preparation of PR based on the approved Agency
Procurement Request (APR).
Property and Supply Officer/s or the equivalent is responsible for the commitment and
obligation related to purchase of supplies and materials from Procurement Service. The
designated Creator shall follow the steps below:
Step 13. Click the Save and Return button when all coding blocks are selected.
Step 14. To check if the chosen coding block has adequate budget cover, click the Roll up
Budget Information button . Click on the (x) to return to the Catalogue Item screen.
Note to the User: Budget information, particularly Appropriations and
Allotments, on the UACS selected will be displayed. In case no rollup
information is displayed or the rollup information only shows MDP and Cash
Allocation, it means that there’s no budget for the selected coding block.
Step 15. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 16. Click on the Suggested Vendors Tab .
Note to the User: Completion of this information is applicable only when
vendor is known.
Step 17. Add a vendor by clicking on the buttons lookup . Select Procurement
Service from the Vendor list.
Step 18. Input the Justification. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR
screen.
Step 19. Click on the Attachment Tab
Step 20. To add an attachment, click the New button . Input the Attachment title, and
the description of the attachment.
Note to the User: Refer to the list of documentary requirements as the required
supporting documents.
Step 21. Select “Browse” to attach the file, primarily the scanned (pdf) copy of the APR. Put
the document date in the date field.
Step 22. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 23. Once all required fields and tabs are complete, click on the Save button to
save the PR. A message is displayed saying that the PR is successfully created.
Step 24. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 25. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.4.1.2Approval of PR
The BTMS solution has built in control features; the system will check for the availability of
budgets for the purchase. If there is no budget, then it will not allow the Creator to save the
PR and request for approval. Relative to this, the Users from Procurement or Budget Division,
whichever handles the final and approved APP, will review, verify and approve the PR. The
final approval of PR by the Procurement Management Division Chief or the equivalent certifies
the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers the automatic creation of commitment to
set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
4.4.1.3Preparation of PO
In this case, procurement process is considered done by the Procurement Service. So, the
Vendor to which the purchase will be made is already identified.
The PO is a form or document used by NGA to purchase goods or services. The document is
addressed to a supplier, in this case the Procurement Service, to deliver specific quantities of
supplies, goods or property, subject to terms and conditions contained in the PO.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies. The designated Creator shall follow the
steps below:
4.4.1.4Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent.
The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget Division Chief or the
equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the availability of budget
cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is the Administrative
Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing units. The final approval of the PO will
automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
4.4.1.5Preparation of DV
The Creator from the PSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 03 03 010 00 – Due from National Government Agencies
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 15. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.4.1.6Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full coding block used
in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 03 03 010 00 – Due from National Government Agencies
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV. A window appears
to confirm the new JEV creation.
All PPE items are accounted for using asset method pursuant to Government Accounting
Manual prescribed by COA. Based on the delivery from Procurement Service which GRN is
prepared and approved, the Accounting Division shall prepare adjusting JEV to consider all
goods received from Procurement Service as Asset items which UACS Object coding starts
with 106xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full coding block used
in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (as originally coded in PR)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: (as originally coded in PR)
Object Code: (examples)
5 06 04 050 01 - Machinery
5 06 04 050 02 - Office Equipment
5 06 04 050 03 - ICT Equipment
5 06 04 050 07 - Communication Equipment
5 06 04 050 99 - Other Machinery and Equipment
5 06 04 060 01 - Motor Vehicles
5 06 04 060 99 - Other Transportation Equipment
5 06 04 070 01 - Furniture and Fixtures
5 06 04 070 02 - Books
5 06 04 090 99 - Other Property, Plant and Equipment
5 06 06 020 00 - Computer Software
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV. A window appears
to confirm the new JEV creation.
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
The Attachments Tab provides venue for attaching files that the Responsibility Unit may
consider relevant for documented support. Each file should have a Title, Description, Date,
User, and document Language.
There are Supplies and Materials that are available through the Procurement Service, and
sometimes these simply run out of stock. Following the RA 9184 guidelines and procedures,
the agency procures these goods directly from the Suppliers. These goods may arise from the
updated APP or an emergency purchase.
Note to the User: In cases of unplanned purchases or those goods that
emerge as the need arises, the requesting unit shall inform the Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent to update the APP to capture the recent
purchase items.
4.4.2.1Preparation of PR
For items indicated in the APP and PPMP, the Property and Supply Officer/s or the equivalent
is responsible for the commitment and obligation related to purchase of supplies and materials.
For emergency purchases, it would be a function of the RC or BSO requesting the purchase
of the item/s. The transaction Creators and First-line Approvers shall represent the requesting
unit.
Step 17. To add an attachment, click the New button . Input the Attachment title, and
the description of the attachment.
Note to the User: Refer to the list of documentary requirements as the required
supporting documents.
Step 18. Select “Browse” to attach the file. Indicate the document date in the date field.
Step 19. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 20. Once all required fields and tabs are complete, click on the Save button to
save the PR. A message is displayed saying that the PR is successfully created.
Step 21. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 22. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.4.2.2Approval of PR
All created PRs shall pass through review and approval. The Users from Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent, whichever handles the final and approved APP, will
review, verify and approve the PR. The final approval of PR by the Procurement Management
Division Chief or the equivalent certifies the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers
the automatic creation of commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
4.4.2.3Preparation of PO
After observance of the procurement guidelines per RA 9184, which is outside of BTMS, and
once the supplier/s is known, the preparation of PO will be done through the system. The PO
is addressed to a Supplier to order and deliver specific quantities of supplies, goods or
property, subject to terms and conditions contained in the document.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies.
Note to the User: All Suppliers must be registered with PhilGEPS. All other
payees must be enrolled in BTMS through the System Administrators. These
are prerequisites to preparation of PO and ObR.
4.4.2.4Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is
the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing unit, the PMD. The final
approval of the PO will automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from
Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
1. Quantity Received/Returned (updated received Quantity)
2. Rejections/Return Reason
3. Amount
Step 7. If the transaction is tax relevant, click on the Tax Information tab to review and update
the taxes as required and choose .
Step 8. After entering all the necessary information related to the Return Note, you can now
proceed in saving the Return Note by clicking the Save button .
Step 9. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select Approval
Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 10. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
Note to the User: During the preparation of DV, only POs with GRNs are
eligible for payments. The disbursement amounts will be limited to the amount
of goods received.
4.4.2.7Preparation of DV
The Creator from the PSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
1. VAT-Registered Suppliers
a. 1% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
2. Non-VAT Suppliers
a. 1% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 3% Percentage Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
4.4.2.8Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
Manual prescribed by COA. Based on the approved GRN, the Accounting Division shall
prepare adjusting JEV to consider all goods received from Suppliers as Asset items which
UACS Object coding starts with 106xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
2. Adjusting Entries for the Asset Recognition (automatically generated by the system)
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060501000/** – Machinery
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060502000/** – Office Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060503000/** – ICT Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060507000/** – Communications
Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060599000/** – Other Machinery and
Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060601000/** – Motor Vehicles
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060699000/** – Other Transportation
Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060701000/** – Furniture and Fixtures
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1060702000/** – Books
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1069999000/** – Other Property, Plant and
Equipment
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/1080102000/** – Computer Software
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5060405000/** – Machinery and
Equipment Outlay
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5060406000/** – Transportation
Equipment Outlay
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5060407000/** – Furniture, Fixtures and
Books Outlay
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5060409000/** – Other Property Plant and
Equipment Outlay
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx100000100001000/5060600000/** – Intangible Assets Outlay
4.4.3.1Preparation of PR
The PR is the same form used to request for the purchase of certain service. For items
indicated in the APP and PPMP, the General Services Division (GSD) or the equivalent is
responsible for the commitment and obligation related to purchase of services. For emergency
repairs and maintenance, it would be a function of the RC or BSO requesting the purchase of
the item/s, subject to prerequisites established by the Admin Service. The transaction Creators
and First-line Approvers shall represent the requesting unit.
Note to the User: The General Services-Maintenance Division shall issue a
Pre-Inspection Report as a prerequisite for PR Approval. For motor vehicles,
the General Services-Motorpool Division shall issue the Pre-Inspection Report.
Step 9. To select the item, click the search button to display the item catalogue for requisition.
Select the specific catalogue item from the list
Step 10. Input the empty values on the required fields: Unit Price and Quantity
Step 11. Type in the Description the complete specifications or requirements of the goods or
services to purchase.
Step 12. To select the UACS coding block, click on the Elements button. Then select
from the dropdown list the applicable values for the coding blocks.
Fund Source
Repairs and Maintenance Expense are normally charged to General Fund, Specific
Budget of Agency – 01 1 01 101, unless otherwise specified
Note to the User: Prepare separate ObR for each Fund Source.
PAP
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency. Normally, the Security and Janitorial Services for example are charged to
General Admin and Support - General Management and Supervision – 1 0 00 00 1
00001 000. Specify the PAP Codes applicable to the type of purchase, especially when
charged to Support to Operations and Operations.
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The system
applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see its own Organization
Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
For expenditures, these include all the Capital Outlays that start with 506xxxxxxx.
Major Repairs and Maintenance expenditure items are added to the value of the
assets. These items can be seen in detail in the dropdown lists, and may include any
of the following:
Machinery and Equipment Outlay – 5 06 04 050 00
Transportation Equipment Outlay – 5 06 04 060 00
Furniture, Fixtures and Books Outlay – 5 06 04 070 00
Other Property Plant and Equipment Outlay – 5 06 04 090 00
Intangible Assets Outlay – 5 06 06 000 00
Step 13. Click the Save and Return button when all coding blocks are selected.
Step 14. To check if the chosen coding block has adequate budget cover, click the Roll up
Budget Information button . Click on the (x) to return to the Catalogue Item screen.
Note to the User: Budget information, particularly Appropriations and
Allotments, on the UACS selected will be displayed. In case no rollup
information is displayed or the rollup information only shows MDP and Cash
Allocation, it means that there’s no budget for the selected coding block.
Step 15. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 16. Click on the Attachment Tab
Step 17. To add an attachment, click the New button . Input the Attachment title, and
the description of the attachment.
Note to the User: Refer to the list of documentary requirements as the required
supporting documents.
Step 18. Select “Browse” to attach the file. Indicate the document date in the date field.
Step 19. Click the Save and return button to return to the PR screen.
Step 20. Once all required fields and tabs are complete, click on the Save button to
save the PR. A message is displayed saying that the PR is successfully created.
Step 21. Once the PR is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 22. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.4.3.2Approval of PR
All created PRs shall pass through review and approval. The Users from Procurement
Management Division or the equivalent, whichever handles the final and approved APP, will
review, verify and approve the PR. The final approval of PR by the Procurement Management
Division Chief or the equivalent certifies the availability of budget cover or funds, and triggers
the automatic creation of commitment to set aside the budgets for the purchase.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task first to his/her immediate Supervisor. This would trigger a pending task for the next line
approver until fully approved. Transmitting the PR in BTMS from one stage to another stage
as described above, the steps below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PR for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once the
transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Procurement Management Division
which makes the final review and approval of the obligation.
4.4.3.3Preparation of PO
The PO is a form or document used by agency to purchase services. After observance of the
procurement guidelines per RA 9184, which is outside of BTMS, and once the supplier/s is
known, the preparation of PO will be done through the system. The PO is addressed to a
Supplier to order and deliver specific quality of service, subject to terms and conditions
contained in the document.
Preparation of PO is a special function of the PMD or the equivalent which centrally handles
the purchasing function of the respective agencies.
Note to the User: All Suppliers must be registered with PhilGEPS. All other
payees must be enrolled in BTMS through the System Administrators. These
are prerequisites to preparation of PO and ObR.
Step 4. To attach PRs to the PO, Click the Add button on the Attached Requisitions
field.
Step 5. In the PR field, click on the Look up and Search button to choose the
PR from the list. Once selected, the item will be listed under PRs Item.
Note to the User: User can select multiple PRs for a single PO provided they
are due to the same Vendor.
Step 6. Fill out the Comments field to provide additional information related to the selected
PR.
Step 7. On the PR Items screen, check the Select tickbox to assign items that will be
purchased or ordered.
Note to the User: Notice that the Assign tickbox on the right side automatically
populates.
Step 8. Click the Assign Requisition Items button and Save and Return button
to go back to the main PO screen.
Step 9. Click on the PO Item tab to input necessary details. The details of the PR will be
carried forward to the PO Items. You can select the PO item and update it, as needed.
Step 10. In the PO Item Drops tab, update details on Delivery Date From, Delivery Date To,
and Quantity.
Step 11. Click the Save and Return button to return to the PO Item Screen.
Step 12. Click on the Attachments Tab to attach supporting files, photos, and scanned copies
of documents related to the PO.
Step 13. Click on the Update and Return button to return to the PO Screen.
Step 14. After entering all the necessary information related to the PO, proceed to saving the
PO by clicking the Save button. A message is displayed saying that the PR is
successfully created.
Step 15. Once the PO is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.4.3.4Approval of PO
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as CAF. The final approver is
the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the purchasing unit, the PMD. The final
approval of the PO will automatically create the ObR and transfer the amount from
Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
Step 1. Navigate to Goods Return Note: Menu ► Purchasing ► Receive and Return Notes
Step 2. By default, Receive/Return note screen will open in Search mode. To create new
Return Note, click on New button.
Step 3. Receive/Return Note screen will be open in insert mode. Populate all the mandatory
fields (*), and all other necessary fields for the transaction.
Note to the User: Since we are creating Return note, make sure to select
‘Return’. A Receive Note must be prepared first as a reference for the Return.
Step 4. Click New button under Goods/Services Received/Rejected Note Details tab.
A new window will open to enter the note details.
Step 5. In the PO field, the PO number in the Header will be copied. Click on the Lookup button
on the GRN Detail field and choose the Correlative that you will update.
Step 6. Once selected, the details of the Receipt Note will be copied. Update all mandatory
fields and other necessary fields:
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
Note to the User: During the preparation of DV, only POs with GRNs are
eligible for payments. The disbursement amounts will be limited to the amount
of goods received.
4.4.3.7Preparation of DV
The Creator from the GSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
DV:
display the list, and then select the specific PO from the list. All PO information including the
UACS Coding Blocks will be carried forward to the DV screen.
Note to the User: Make sure that the GRN is approved against this PO.
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to select the specific Vendor from
the list.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the TBA, and then
select the appropriate bank account from the list, example:
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Funding Source Description
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by ADA;
001-001 510-5 (ADA) Disb under
General Fund-
New Gen Appro,
NGA Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To deduct withholding taxes, click the underlined UACS Coding Block where tax is
applicable.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
1. VAT-Registered Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
2. Non-VAT Suppliers
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 3% Percentage Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
12 and then click the Save and return icon .
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 17. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 18. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 19. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 20. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.4.3.8Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
The construction of these type of PPEs are indicated in the Annual Procurement Plan (APP)
and/or Project Procurement Management Plan (PPMP). Once the contract agreement is
signed and approved, following the Procurement Law, the succeeding transactions will be
processed in BTMS.
As prescribed by GAM, during the construction period, all expenses incurred in relation to the
construction of the PPE shall be taken up in the books as Construction in Progress (CIP) with
the appropriate asset classification.
The Purchase Order (PO) is a form or document used by agency to record the contract
agreement in the system. The PO is addressed to a Supplier or Contractor to order and deliver
specific bill of quantities and civil works, subject to terms and conditions contained in the
Contract Agreement.
Fund Source
Infrastructure Outlays are normally charged to Special Purpose Funds – 01 1 01
400s, unless otherwise specified
Note to the User: Prepare separate Obligation Request for each Fund Source.
PAP
The PAP code is determined from the Programs, Activities and Projects of each
Agency. Normally, the PPE construction is either charged to Support to Operations or
Operations with specific MFO.
Organization Code
Each operating unit has its own assigned Organization or Institution Code. The system
applies Security Group restrictions, so the user would only see its own Organization
Code whether Central Office, Regional Office, or Bureau.
Object Code
For expenditures, these include all the Capital Outlays that start with 506xxxxxxx.
Major Repairs and Maintenance expenditure items are added to the value of the
assets. These items can be seen in detail in the dropdown lists, and may include any
of the following:
Land Improvements Outlay – 5 06 04 020 00
Infrastructure Outlay – 5 06 04 030 00
Buildings and Other Structures Outlay – 5 06 04 040 00
Intangible Assets Outlay – 5 06 06 000 00
Step 7. For Lumpsum amount- indicate the 100% in the Quantity; For CIP with BOQ- indicate
the number of quantity per phase of the project.
Step 8. Click the Save and Return button to return to the Purchase Order Item Screen.
Step 9. Click on the Attachments Tab to attach supporting files, photos, and scanned copies
of documents related to the PO.
Step 10. Click on the Update and Return button to return to the PO Screen.
Step 11. After entering all the necessary information related to the PO, proceed to saving the
PO by clicking the Save button. A message is displayed saying that the PR is
successfully created.
Step 12. Once the PO is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 13. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
From the PO Creator, the form shall be transitioned to First-line Approver who is the Chief of
the PMD or the equivalent. The next approver in the PO process workflow will be the Budget
Division Chief or the equivalent who will review, verify and certify the PO. This certifies the
availability of budget cover or funds, which is otherwise known as Certificate of Availability of
Funds (CAF). The final approver is the Administrative Service, being the parent BSO of the
purchasing unit, the PMD. The final approval of the PO will automatically create the Obligation
Request and transfer the amount from Commitment to Obligation.
Once the Creator successfully executes the transition, the system will assign the approving
task. This would trigger a pending task for the next line approver until fully approved.
Transitioning the PO in BTMS from one stage to another stage as described above, the steps
below shall be followed:
Step 1. The Approver shall click on Internal message button to open and view the
message.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button below the message box. Then the system will
open the respective PO for review and further action.
Step 4. Scroll up to Transition field, select the appropriate transition from the dropdown list
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button that will appear when option is selected.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed, and click on Finish . Once
the transition is executed successfully, the system will give confirmation message.
PMD should inform Accounting Division the grant of advance to specific contractor. The
Accounting Division shall then create sub-ledger account for the said contractor. Sub-ledger
codes are important to monitor the advances.
The Creator from the Procurement Management Division or the equivalent, or the Creator of
the PO, should follow the steps below to create Disbursement Voucher:
Step 5. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to select the specific Vendor or
the Contractor from the list.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the Treasury Bank
Account (TBA), and then select the appropriate bank account from the list, example:
Funding
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Description
Source
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001 510-5 (ADA) ADA; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01101101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund-New Gen
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset Codes,
and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate” or
“Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 99 02 010 00 – Advances to Contractors
Step 11. Upon selecting the UACS elements for the Advances to contractors, the Sub Ledger
field is displayed. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of
Sub-ledger codes, and then select the applicable Subledger for the DV transaction from the
list of active Accountable Advances.
Step 12. Type in the description and click the Save and return icon to return to the DV
Line Item screen.
Step 13. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the Payment
Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 14. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the Disbursement Voucher screen.
Step 15. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 16. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 17. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Disbursement Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the Disbursement Vouchers.
To process the payment for each Progress Billing in BTMS, the item should be recorded first
as received by the agency. The acceptance of the progress billing rate in the form of Goods
Received Note is a pre-requisite for the preparation and approval of Disbursement Voucher.
For any Advances to Contractors, this advance payment shall be repaid by the contractor by
deducting recoupment from the progress payments the sum that will be determined by the
Government until it is fully recouped.
There are two important roles here, the Creator and the Approver. Once goods, property or
services are delivered by Procurement Service and received by the agency, the Property and
Supply Division (PSD) or the equivalent will need to create Goods Receipt Notes. Then the
Division Chief will approve the note through the system.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Disbursement Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 6. Inform the Accounting Division about the delivery and receipt of the goods from
Procurement Service for appropriate adjustment of advances.
Note to the User: During the preparation of DV, only POs with GRNs are
eligible for payments. The disbursement amounts will be limited to the amount
of goods received.
The Creator from the PMD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
Disbursement Voucher:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset
Codes, and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
or “Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 9. To edit the amount and reflect the progress billing, click the underlined UACS Coding
Block, find the Amount field, and enter the Gross Amount Billed.
Step 10. Below the DV Line Item pop-up screen, click the New icon under the tab
attachments to deduct withholding taxes.
Step 11. At the DV Item Tax pop-up screen, indicate the applicable tax rate. To look for the
appropriate tax item/s, click the icons lookup then find . Select the following
applicable tax rates:
a. 2% Expanded Withholding Tax
b. 5% VAT Withholding Tax
Step 12. Next, indicate the operation by clicking “Deducted” from the dropdown list. Then click
the Save and return icon to return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 13. For multiple tax items, add another applicable tax rate/s. Simply follow Steps 10 to
12 and then click the Save and return icon .
Step 14. Once the chosen tax items are reflected in the screen correctly, click Save and return
icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the screen to save users modifications
and return to the DV Line Item screen. At the DV screen, the tax deductions will be reflected
as negative entries.
Step 15. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 16. At the DV screen, click the New icon under the tab attachments to add more
items, such as Recoupment of Mobilization. Complete the UACS Coding Blocks as follows:
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 1 99 02 010 00 – Advances to Contractors
Step 17. Upon selecting the UACS elements for the Advances sub-object, the Sub ledger field
is displayed. Select the applicable Sub-ledger code.
Step 18. Check the Is Advance Recovery checkbox to select the accountable advance where
the liquidation is applied to.
Step 19. Enter the amounts with negative signs, type in the description and click the Save and
return icon .
Step 20. Back to the DV screen, click the New icon under the tab attachments to add
more items, such as 10% Retention Fee. Complete the UACS Coding Blocks as follows:
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2 04 01 040 00 – Guaranty/Security Deposits Payable
Step 21. Enter the amounts with negative signs, type in the description and click the Save and
return icon .
Step 22. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the
Payment Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 23. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the Disbursement Voucher screen.
Step 24. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 25. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 26. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
Note to the User: Do the same for the succeeding payments for progress
billings until full and final payment.
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Disbursement Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the Disbursement Vouchers.
The designated PSD Creator shall update Asset Item of the related Construction in Progress
account every time a progress billing is received. Follow the steps below:
A Bid Security accompanies each bid by Interested Bidders. This so-called Performance Bond
is a guarantee that a contractor would complete the project as intended and agreed. Those
bonds in the form of cash, certified check, cashier’s check or manager’s check, bank draft, or
bank guarantee are recorded as refundable collections.
See Section 3.5.2 for the recording of receipts. The refund shall be made upon compliance
with the stipulations of the contract and satisfactory performance.
The Creator from the GSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
Disbursement Voucher:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset
Codes, and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
or “Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: 07308603 (or appropriate fund code originally used in the
collection and deposit)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2 04 01 040 00 – Guaranty/Security Deposits Payable
Step 11. Click Save and return icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the
screen to save users modifications and return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the
Payment Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the Disbursement Voucher screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 15. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 26. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Disbursement Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the Disbursement Vouchers.
Retention money is warranty for hidden defects during the construction, including the one-
year defects liability period after project completion. Retention money is basically released
after the end of the liability period of 1 year and when the certificate of acceptance is already
issued. If the contractor wants to withdraw the retention money before the lapse of 1-year
defect liability period, replacement by the surety bond may be allowed.
Either way, the return of retention money shall follow the process steps below:
The Creator from the GSD or the Creator of the PR should follow the steps below to create
Disbursement Voucher:
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset
Codes, and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
or “Net 30 Days” from the list.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: 07308603 (or appropriate fund code originally used in the
collection and deposit)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2 04 01 040 00 – Guaranty/Security Deposits Payable
Step 11. Click Save and return icon or the Update icon at the bottom of the
screen to save users modifications and return to the DV Line Item screen.
Step 12. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 13. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the
Payment Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 14. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the Disbursement Voucher screen.
Step 15. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 16. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 17. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective
Disbursement Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the Disbursement Vouchers.
The Accounting Division shall prepare adjusting JEV to close the CIP accounts to appropriate
Asset account which UACS Object coding starts with 106xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► Journal Entry Voucher.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users
will then be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (examples)
1060306000 Communications Networks
1060309000 Parks, Plazas and Monuments
1060401000 Buildings
1060406000 Hostels and Dormitories
1060499000 Other Structures
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with
Debit and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to
total Credit amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (as originally coded in PR)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: (as originally coded in PR)
Object Code: (examples)
1061002000 - Construction in Progress – Infrastructure Assets
1061003000 - Construction in Progress – Buildings and Other
Structures
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new Journal Entry Voucher.
A window appears to confirm the new Journal Entry Voucher creation.
The JEVs will be routed to the Accounting Division Chief for approval. Once the
document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about the
assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the button
is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Maintenance of PPE register will be done through the system providing mandatory information
such as asset ID, asset classification and sub-classification, Asset item group, value of the
asset, asset acquisition methods, depreciation method and period, salvage value, item
operational status, disposal details, etc.
The Asset Item screen contains information regarding the different assets that the
organization may have. Assets are economic resources that are tangible or intangible and are
capable of being owned by the organization. This screen contains different information about
each asset such as Amount, Depreciation, Asset Class, Useful Life, and other pieces of
information. An example of an Asset Item is Motor Vehicle which, like all assets, would be
kept track of in a Balance Sheet by the agency’s accountants.
The designated PSD Creator shall manually create the Asset Item following the steps below:
Step 1. Navigate the Menu ► Property, Plant and Equipment Management ► Asset
Items. Click on the New button.
Step 2. Select the asset class for Construction in Progress accounts namely:
10610000-Construction in Progress
10610010-CIP-Land Improvements
10610020-CIP-Infrastructure Assets
10610030-CIP-Buildings and Other Structures
10610040-CIP- Leased Assets
10610050-CIP- Leased Assets Improvements
Step 3. Fields with an asterisk are mandatory fields. Populate the required fields. Note that
Item type selected should be “Being Constructed”. Input the Unit Cost which is equivalent to
the amount of the 1st Progress Billing for the Construction Project. Input the Original Cost
which is equivalent to the Construction in Progress Contract Price.
Step 4. To edit the UACS for the Asset coding block, select the coding block, click on the
Elements button. Then select from the dropdown list the applicable values for the
coding blocks. Normally, updating shall be made for the Fund Category, Operating Unit,
Province (for location), Project Title, and Responsibility Center codes. Do the same for the
UACS for the Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Revaluation coding
blocks. For example: Asset Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1061001000/**
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1061002000/**
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1061003000/**
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1061004000/**
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1061005000/**
Step 7. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
In conjunction to the JEV preparation to capitalize completely constructed assets, the PSD
shall create the Asset Transaction to close the CIP accounts previously created.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 6. Enter the Accounting Office by click on the Lookup button, click on .
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
4.5.1.1 Preparation of RV
RV is the form used to manage receipts. Receipt Management is the process of recording,
classifying and managing revenue collections from different sources. The main function is to
ensure that correct recording and reporting of revenues and other receipts.
4.5.1.2 Approval of RV
Once the RV is assigned, the authorized user-approver, usually the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, will get a message about the assignment.
4.5.1.3 Reversal of RV
Reversal of RV is done if there is any mistake done in RV and is already approved. Upon
reversal, system will create a reversed RV and an automatic corresponding JEV. The reversal
RV will go through the same approval process as described for RV above.
To reverse a RV, the Chief Accountant or the equivalent shall take the following steps:
An RRV is a record of a payment made by a customer. The RRV function allows tracking of
items or services for which a customer has paid and applies the amount accordingly. This is
a special function of Cashier or Cash Division personnel as collecting officer.
Step 1. Navigate to RRV: Menu ► Receipt Management ► RRV. By default, the RRV screen
will open in Search mode.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the appropriate field(s). If user
prefers to see a list of all RRVs, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVs will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the RRV
that needs to be printed.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the RRV will be displayed. Click on the PDF Form button
to print/view the form.
4.5.2.1 Preparation of RV
RV is the form used to manage receipts. Receipt Management is the process of recording,
classifying and managing revenue collections from different sources. The main function is to
ensure that correct recording and reporting of revenues and other receipts.
Step 10. Click on the ‘Save and Return’ icon to save the RV Item information and
return to the RV screen.
Step 11. Under the Tab click the Edit link.
Step 12. Enter the mandatory fields, denoted by an asterisk (*) to create a new RV Item.
Step 13. Click on the ‘Save and Return’ or Update icon to save the RV Payment
Details information and return to the RV screen.
Step 14. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new RV.
Step 15. Go to Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 16. Click Transition button .
Step 17. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed. Then click on Finish .
4.5.2.2 Approval of RV
Once the RV is assigned, the authorized user-approver, usually the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, will get a message about the assignment.
4.5.2.3 Reversal of RV
Reversal of RV is done if there is any mistake done in RV and is already approved. Upon
reversal, system will create a reversed RV and an automatic corresponding JEV. The reversal
RV will go through the same approval process as described for RV above.
To reverse a RV, the Chief Accountant or the equivalent shall take the following steps:
Step 2. Click the New icon in the RRV screen to change default Search Mode to Insert
Mode.
Step 3. Enter all mandatory fields and Tabs, denoted by an asterisk ( )
Step 4. To add the Customer, click on the Lookup and Find buttons to display
the list of all customers. Then select the applicable customer.
Step 5. To add the Offset code, click on the Lookup and Find buttons to display
the list of all offset codes. Then select Cash-Collecting Officer – 1 01 01 010 00.
Step 6. To add the Bank Account, click on the Lookup and Find buttons to
display the list of all Bank Accounts. Then select the applicable Bank account from the list.
Step 7. Click the Save icon, to finish the creation of the RRV.
Step 8. Click the New icon under the Tab to add a RRV
Item.
Step 9. Enter the RRV Item information. Fields with an asterisk ( ) are mandatory fields.
Step 10. Click the Save and Return icon to save the RRV Item Information and return
to the RRV screen.
Step 11. Click the New icon under the Tab to add
RRV Applied Item.
Step 12. Enter the RRV Applied Item information. Fields with an asterisk ( ) are mandatory
fields.
Step 13. To add the RV on the RRV Applied Item, click on the Lookup button.
Step 14. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV.
Step 15. Select the RV from the list.
Step 16. To add the RV Payment Details, click the Lookup button.
Step 17. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV Payment Details.
Step 18. Select the applicable Voucher payment details from the list.
Step 19. Click the Save and Return icon to save RRV Applied Item information and
return to the RRV Item.
Step 20. Click the Save and Return button to go back to the RRV Screen.
Step 1. Navigate to RRV: Menu ► Receipt Management ► RRV. By default, the RRV screen
will open in Search mode.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the appropriate field(s). If user
prefers to see a list of all RRVs, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVs will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the RRV
that needs to be printed.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the RRV will be displayed. Click on the PDF Form button
to print/view the PO Form.
4.5.3.1 Preparation of RV
RV is the form used to manage receipts. Receipt Management is the process of recording,
classifying and managing revenue collections from different sources. The main function is to
ensure that correct recording and reporting of revenues and other receipts.
Step 10. Click on the ‘Save and Return’ icon to save the RV Item information and
return to the RV screen.
Step 11. Under the Tab click the Edit link.
Step 12. Enter the mandatory fields, denoted by an asterisk (*) to create a new RV Item.
Step 13. Click on the ‘Save and Return’ or Update icon to save the RV Payment
Details information and return to the RV screen.
Step 14. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new RV.
Step 15. Go to Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 16. Click Transition button .
Step 17. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed. Then click on Finish .
4.5.3.2 Approval of RV
Once the RV is assigned, the authorized user-approver, usually the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, will get a message about the assignment.
4.5.3.3 Reversal of RV
Reversal of RV is done if there is any mistake done in RV and is already approved. Upon
reversal, system will create a reversed RV and an automatic corresponding JEV. The reversal
RV will go through the same approval process as described for RV above.
To reverse a RV, the Chief Accountant or the equivalent shall take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate to RRV: Menu ► Receipt Management ► RRV. By default, the RRV screen
will open in Search mode.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the appropriate field(s). If user
prefers to see a list of all RRVs, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVs will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the RRV
that needs to be printed.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the RRV will be displayed. Click on the PDF Form button
to print/view the PO Form.
After the RRV is issued, it is required to be approved, usually by the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, to automatically record the collection. The assigned approver will get a message
about the assignment. To access it, the user shall take the following steps:
4.5.4.1 Preparation of RV
RV is the form used to manage receipts. Receipt Management is the process of recording,
classifying and managing revenue collections from different sources. The main function is to
ensure that correct recording and reporting of revenues and other receipts.
Step 13. Click on the ‘Save and Return’ or Update icon to save the RV Payment
Details information and return to the RV screen.
Step 14. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new RV.
Step 15. Go to Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 16. Click Transition button .
Step 17. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed. Then click on Finish .
4.5.4.2 Approval of RV
Once the RV is assigned, the authorized user-approver, usually the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, will get a message about the assignment.
4.5.4.3 Reversal of RV
Reversal of RV is done if there is any mistake done in RV and is already approved. Upon
reversal, system will create a reversed RV and an automatic corresponding JEV. The reversal
RV will go through the same approval process as described for RV above.
To reverse a RV, the Chief Accountant or the equivalent shall take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate to RRV: Menu ► Receipt Management ► RRV. By default, the RRV screen
will open in Search mode.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the appropriate field(s). If user
prefers to see a list of all RRVs, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVs will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the RRV
that needs to be printed.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the RRV will be displayed. Click on the PDF Form button
to print/view the PO Form.
4.5.5.1 Preparation of RV
RV is the form used to manage receipts. Receipt Management is the process of recording,
classifying and managing revenue collections from different sources. The main function is to
ensure that correct recording and reporting of revenues and other receipts.
Step 14. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new RV.
Step 15. Go to Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 16. Click Transition button .
Step 17. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed. Then click on Finish .
4.5.5.2 Approval of RV
Once the RV is assigned, the authorized user-approver, usually the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, will get a message about the assignment.
4.5.5.3 Reversal of RV
Reversal of RV is done if there is any mistake done in RV and is already approved. Upon
reversal, system will create a reversed RV and an automatic corresponding JEV. The reversal
RV will go through the same approval process as described for RV above.
To reverse a RV, the Chief Accountant or the equivalent shall take the following steps:
Step 6. To add the Bank Account, click on the Lookup and Find buttons to
display the list of all Bank Accounts. Then select the applicable Bank account from the list.
Step 7. Click the Save icon, to finish the creation of the RRV.
Step 8. Click the New icon under the Tab to add a RRV
Item.
Step 9. Enter the RRV Item information. Fields with an asterisk ( ) are mandatory fields.
Step 10. Click the Save and Return icon to save the RRV Item Information and return
to the RRV screen.
Step 11. Click the New icon under the Tab to add
RRV Applied Item.
Step 12. Enter the RRV Applied Item information. Fields with an asterisk ( ) are mandatory
fields.
Step 13. To add the RV on the RRV Applied Item, click on the Lookup button.
Step 14. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV.
Step 15. Select the RV from the list.
Step 16. To add the RV Payment Details, click the Lookup button.
Step 17. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV Payment Details.
Step 18. Select the applicable Voucher payment details from the list.
Step 19. Click the Save and Return icon to save RRV Applied Item information and
return to the RRV Item.
Step 20. Click the Save and Return button to go back to the RRV Screen.
Step 1. Navigate to RRV: Menu ► Receipt Management ► RRV. By default, the RRV screen
will open in Search mode.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the appropriate field(s). If user
prefers to see a list of all RRVs, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVs will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the RRV
that needs to be printed.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the RRV will be displayed. Click on the PDF Form button
to print/view the PO Form.
Step 6. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed. Then click on Finish .
4.5.6.1 Preparation of RV
RV is the form used to manage receipts. Receipt Management is the process of recording,
classifying and managing revenue collections from different sources. The main function is to
ensure that correct recording and reporting of revenues and other receipts.
4.5.6.2 Approval of RV
Once the RV is assigned, the authorized user-approver, usually the Chief Accountant or the
4.5.6.3 Reversal of RV
Reversal of RV is done if there is any mistake done in RV and is already approved. Upon
reversal, system will create a reversed RV and an automatic corresponding JEV. The reversal
RV will go through the same approval process as described for RV above.
To reverse a RV, the Chief Accountant or the equivalent shall take the following steps:
Step 11. Click the New icon under the Tab to add
RRV Applied Item.
Step 12. Enter the RRV Applied Item information. Fields with an asterisk ( ) are mandatory
fields.
Step 13. To add the RV on the RRV Applied Item, click on the Lookup button.
Step 14. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV.
Step 15. Select the RV from the list.
Step 16. To add the RV Payment Details, click the Lookup button.
Step 17. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV Payment Details.
Step 18. Select the applicable Voucher payment details from the list.
Step 19. Click the Save and Return icon to save RRV Applied Item information and
return to the RRV Item.
Step 20. Click the Save and Return button to go back to the RRV Screen.
Step 1. Navigate to RRV: Menu ► Receipt Management ► RRV. By default, the RRV screen
will open in Search mode.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the appropriate field(s). If user
prefers to see a list of all RRVs, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVs will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the RRV
that needs to be printed.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the RRV will be displayed. Click on the PDF Form button
to print/view the PO Form.
Approval of DVs automatically creates and posts transactions to General Ledgers. BTMS
applies internally the necessary accounting treatment for each type of transaction, as follows:
1. Collection of refunds
3. Collection of incomes
a. Automatic JEV from RV
Debit: 07308602/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1030101000/** – Accounts Receivable
(offset code)
Credit: 07308602/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/4020216005/** – Sale of Accountable
Forms
07308602/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/4020216099/** – Other Sales
(offset code)
Credit: 05206442/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1030101000/** – Accounts Receivable
The Payment Extract Payments screen contains the information regarding Cheques or
electronic transfers, and the workflow control of Extracts. A Cheque/Transfer register could be
the summary of several invoices related to a single vendor.
The user should follow the steps described below for the processing of Payment Extract
Payment.
For transmitting the Payment Extract from one stage to another stage the following steps
should be followed:
Step 1. Click the notification on the Internal Messages displayed on the upper right side of the
screen.
Step 2. Click on the Unread Status of the message to display the details of the Payment
Extract Payment for review.
Step 3. Click on the Update Domain button to go to the particular Payment Extract
screen.
Step 4. Check and verify the completeness of the Payment Extract.
Step 5. Go to the Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 6. Click the Transition Button to add comments on the step note.
Step 7. Then click finish to submit.
Step 7: Feed the blank Cheque into the printer and hit print button.
Note to the User: Check Printing functionality can only be used once. Use
Check Reprinting Report functions to reproduce the same cheque or its
duplicate. Navigate to Menu ► Cash Management ► Payments ► Reports ►
Check Printing Reports and follow the same steps above. All Cash
Divisions/units shall ensure that the printer is configured for BTMS check
printing functionality.
The Payment Extract Payments screen contains the information regarding Cheques or
electronic transfers, and the workflow control of Extracts. A Cheque/Transfer register could be
the summary of several invoices related to a single vendor.
The user should follow the steps described below for the processing of Payment Extract
Payment.
For transmitting the Payment Extract from one stage to another stage the following steps
should be followed:
Step 1. Click the notification on the Internal Messages displayed on the upper right side of the
screen.
Step 2. Click on the Unread Status of the message to display the details of the Payment
Extract Payment for review.
Step 3. Click on the Update Domain button to go to the particular Payment Extract
screen.
Step 4. Check and verify the completeness of the Payment Extract.
Step 5. Go to the Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 6. Click the Transition Button to add comments on the step note.
Step 7. Then click finish to submit.
Step 7: Feed the blank Cheque into the printer and hit print button.
Note to the User: Check Printing functionality can only be used once. Use
Check Reprinting Report functions to reproduce the same cheque or its
duplicate. Navigate to Menu ► Cash Management ► Payments ► Reports ►
Check Printing Reports and follow the same steps above. All Cash
Divisions/units shall ensure that the printer is configured for BTMS check
printing functionality.
The cut-off dates in the opening and closing of fiscal periods shall follow the existing practice,
i.e. at the first day and last day of the month, respectively, whether the days fall on a weekend.
All transactions (PR, PO, GRN, ObR, DV) created in one month shall be completely approved
within the same month to be recorded and reported as Commitments, Obligations and/or
Disbursements of the same fiscal period. Otherwise, the recording of transactions will be
forwarded to the succeeding month/s.
This is a special function of the Accounting Division. The designated Creator shall take the
following steps:
Step 1. Navigation through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► Support Entities ►
Subledgers
The JEVs are generally linked to creation of DVs, Payment Extract Payments, RVs, RRVs,
and hence generated records automatically including ledgers and registries.
To view the JEV created upon approval of DV, follow the steps below:
Step 2. Search mode is the default screen display. Enter the information to be used as retrieval
criteria in the appropriate field(s).
Step 3. If user prefers to see a list of all RRVss, leave all fields blank. Click on the Find
button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVss will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the
RRV and scroll down to the bottom of the approved form.
Step 5. Click the to view the auto-generated JEV.
JEV can also be prepared manually for necessary periodic (month and year-end) adjustment
entries.
To authorize an agency to pay the obligations it incurs, DBM issues a disbursement authority
in the form of a Notice of Cash Allocation (NCA) to the operating agencies to cover their cash
requirements. The NCA specifies the maximum amount of cash that can be withdrawn from
an AGSB for the period indicated (on a monthly or quarterly basis). The NCA is sent to the
bank and an Advice of Notice of Cash Allocation Issued (ANCAI) to the implementing agency,
signaling that the agency can already pay its obligation with its internal and external creditors.
The release of NCAs by DBM is based on an agency’s submission of its Monthly Disbursement
Program and other related documents.
4.7.4.1Preparation of JEV
Although a bank-related transaction, the current practice suggests that the constructive receipt
of Cash Allocations is recorded separately and manually.
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► JEV. By default, users
will be in Search Mode.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block.
Fund Source: 01101101 (or any appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (any of the following)
1 01 04 040 00 – Cash-Modified Disbursement System (MDS), Regular
1 01 04 050 00 – Cash-Modified Disbursement System (MDS), Special
Account
1 01 04 060 00 – Cash-Modified Disbursement System (MDS), Trust
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block.
Fund Source: 01101101 (or any appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (any of the following)
4 03 01 010 00 – Subsidy from National Government (if NCA)
4 03 01 010 00 – Subsidy from Other National Government Agencies
(if NTA)
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Note to the User: If it is recording of expenses, the related ObR that was duly
approved before the preparation of DV should be attached or linked to the JEV
during creation.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV.
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
4.7.5.1Preparation of JEV
The current practice suggests that the constructive receipt of tax remittance is recorded
separately and manually. This applies to non-cash remittances.
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► JEV. By default, users
will be in Search Mode.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block.
Fund Source: 01101101 (or any appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (any of the following)
1 01 04 070 00 – Cash-Tax Remitttance Advice
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block.
Fund Source: 01101101 (or any appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (any of the following)
2 02 01 010 00 – Due to BIR
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Note to the User: If it is recording of expenses, the related ObR that was duly
approved before the preparation of DV should be attached or linked to the JEV
during creation.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new JEV.
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
Bank Reconciliation
Bank Reconciliation is an essential internal control process of matching and comparing figures
recorded in the books of accounts with those listed in the bank statements. The bank
reconciliation process shall be performed daily to ensure that both records of financial
transactions are reconciled and correct. e-Banking would be helpful in facilitating this process
simply because the bank statements can be viewed and downloaded real-timely. Therefore,
the General Ledger for cash and/or Subsidiary Ledgers for each bank account shall be brought
up to date on a daily basis. A Bank Reconciliation Statement (BRS) shall be prepared to report
the disparities, complete with supporting schedules on deposits in transit and outstanding
Checks.
The Accounting Unit shall be responsible for the Bank Reconciliation, downloading of Bank
Statements from the AGSBs’ websites, bringing into account the identified correcting/adjusting
entries for discrepancies/errors and the related submission of BRS to COA Resident Auditors
within 15 days after the end of the month
4.7.6.1Preparation of JEV
For bank reconciliation prepared separately and manually, the Accounting Officer shall create
a standalone or manual JEV, following the steps below:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► JEV. By default, users
will be in Search Mode.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block.
Fund Source: 01101101 (or any appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (examples)
5 03 01 040 00 – Bank Charges
5 03 01 990 00 – Other Financial Charges
1 01 02 010 00 – Cash in Bank-Local Currency, BSP
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the JEV Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block.
Fund Source: 01101101 (or any appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
6. Receipt of NCA
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1010404000/** – Cash- MDS, Regular
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1010405000/** – Cash- MDS, Special
Account
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1010406000/** – Cash- MDS, Trust
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/4030101000/** – Subsidy from National
Government
7. Receipt of NTA
Debit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1010404000/** – Cash- MDS, Regular
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1010405000/** – Cash- MDS, Special
Account
01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/1010406000/** – Cash- MDS, Trust
Credit: 01101101/*/1339/xxxxx000000000000000/4030102000/** – Subsidy from Other
4.7.8.1Preparation of DV
Step 1. Navigate to DV: Menu ► Payment Management ► DVs.
Step 2. By default, the form opens in Search mode. Press New button to create a
new voucher.
Step 3. Some required information is automatically filled out based on the User credentials.
Update when necessary.
Step 4. Click the dropdown list to select the DV Classification. Choose “Prior Year
Obligations”.
Step 5. To select for the Vendor, click the Lookup and Search buttons to display
the list, and then select the specific Vendor, Payee or Institution from the list.
Step 6. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the TBA, and then
select the appropriate bank account from the list, example:
Code Abbreviation TBA Type Funding Source Description
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01102101 Payment by ADA;
001-001 510-5 (ADA) Disb under
General Fund-
Continuing
Appro, NGA
Specific
10104040-00- MDS-2-0001- Virtual 01102101 Payment by
001-001A 510-5 (CHQ) Cheque; Disb
under General
Fund- Continuing
Appro, NGA
Specific
Step 7. Click the Lookup and Search buttons to display the list of Offset
Codes, and then select Accounts Payable – 2 01 01 010 00
Step 8. Click the dropdown list of the appropriate Payment Terms and choose “Immediate”
from the list.
Step 9. To add items, click the New icon down below the DV Line Item pop-up screen
under the attachments tab.
Step 10. Enter the amount and complete the UACS Coding Block.
To complete the UACS Coding Blocks, select the following segments:
Fund Source: 01102101 (or other appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2 04 01 010 00 – Trust Liabilities (or any other General
Ledger Code used to record the prior years’ obligations)
Step 11. Type in the description and click Save and return icon .
Step 12. Click on Payment Details Tab and select the applicable Payment Method. Payment
by Cheque is the default value. Change when necessary by clicking on the created payment
detail (any underlined item). There are two options: Cheque or ADA. Then enter the
Payment Amount (Domestic) and the Payment due date.
Step 13. Press Click on the Save and Return button once done or the Update and
Return button, and the system will return to the DV screen.
Step 14. Press the Save button, and a confirmation box will appear confirming that
the DV has been created.
Step 15. Once the DV is created, saved and confirmed, go up to Transition field, select
Approval Requested, then Click Transition button to finish the creation process.
Step 16. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if required. Then, click on Finish .
4.7.8.2Approval of DV
The DV will be routed to the proper approver. The approval sequence starts with the Creator’s
immediate Supervisor or the BSO Head he/she belongs. This will then be forwarded to the
Accounting Division Processor for review, then to the Accounting Division Chief for approval,
and finally the Head of Agency to authorize the payment.
Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about
the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the
button is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective DV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Note to the User: Monitor the status of the request by revisiting the prepared
form. Click the Workflow History button at the top panel to check the
level of approval. Make follow-ups with the Accounting Division which makes
the final review and approval of the DVs.
These functions are performed by the Property and Supply unit or division and shared with
the Accounting unit or division for the periodic accounting and financial reporting.
Donated Assets, with or without condition, shall be taken up at its fair value at the date of
acquisition. All expenses incurred related to the acquisition shall be recognized as part of the
asset.
GAM Volume I, Chapter 10, Section 12 provides the guidelines to recognize acquisition of
assets through donation without condition. The Accounting Division shall prepare adjusting
JEV to recognize the appropriate Asset account which UACS Object coding starts with
106xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► Journal Entry Voucher.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (examples)
1060502000 Office Equipment
1060503000 ICT Equipment
1060507000 Communications Equipment
1060509000 Disaster Response and Rescue Equipment
1060511000 Medical Equipment
1060601000 Motor Vehicle
1060701000 Furniture and Fixtures
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (as originally coded in PR)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 4040202000 – Income from Grants and Donation In Kind
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new Journal Entry Voucher.
A window appears to confirm the new Journal Entry Voucher creation.
GAM Volume I, Chapter 10, Section 13 provides the guidelines to recognize acquisition of
assets through donation with condition or restrictions. A liability must be recognized until the
condition is fulfilled and the restrictions are lifted. The Accounting Division shall prepare
adjusting JEV to recognize the appropriate Asset account which UACS Object coding starts
with 106xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► Journal Entry Voucher.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: (examples)
1060502000 Office Equipment
1060503000 ICT Equipment
1060507000 Communications Equipment
1060509000 Disaster Response and Rescue Equipment
1060511000 Medical Equipment
1060601000 Motor Vehicle
1060701000 Furniture and Fixtures
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (as originally coded in PR)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2050199000 – Other Deferred Credits
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new Journal Entry Voucher.
A window appears to confirm the new Journal Entry Voucher creation.
The Accounting Division shall prepare adjusting JEV to recognize the appropriate Asset
account which UACS Object coding starts with 106xxxxxxx.
To create the JEV, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 1. Navigate through Menu ► Accounting & Financial Reporting ► Journal Entry Voucher.
Step 2. Click on New icon (by default, users will be in Search Mode). Users will then
be in Insert Mode.
Step 3. Enter mandatory Fields and Tabs, denoted with an asterisk
Step 4. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the debit account.
Step 5. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (appropriate fund code)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 2050199000 – Other Deferred Credits
Step 6. Fill out the debit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Note to the User: There must be at least two JEV Items added: one with Debit
and one with Credit. The total Debit amount should be equal to total Credit
amount.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block. The full
coding block used in the DV for the advance should be used.
Fund Source: (as originally coded in PR)
Organization: (your respective institution code)
Location: 0000 (not defined), unless defined
PAP: 000000000000000 (not defined)
Object Code: 4040202000 – Income from Grants and Donation In Kind
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field and the appropriate item description.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new Journal Entry Voucher.
A window appears to confirm the new Journal Entry Voucher creation.
The JEVs will be routed to the Accounting Division Chief for approval. Once the
document/form is assigned, the authorized user-approver will get a message about the
assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task in the Dashboard, when the button
is activated. The Approver shall then take the following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective JEV for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Maintenance of PPE register will be done through the system providing mandatory information
such as asset ID, asset classification and sub-classification, Asset item group, value of the
asset, asset acquisition methods, depreciation method and period, salvage value, item
operational status, disposal details, etc.
The Asset Item screen contains information regarding the different assets that the
organization may have. Assets are economic resources that are tangible or intangible and are
capable of being owned by the organization. This screen contains different information about
each asset such as Amount, Depreciation, Asset Class, Useful Life, and other pieces of
information. An example of an Asset Item is Motor Vehicle which, like all assets, would be
kept track of in a Balance Sheet by the agency’s accountants.
The designated PSD Creator shall manually create the Asset Item following the steps below:
Step 1. By default, the Asset Item is in Search Mode. Click on the New button.
Step 2. The Asset item is now on Insert mode. Enter the new Asset Item information.
Fields with an asterisk (*) are mandatory fields.
Step 3. To add an Asset Class, click on the Look up button and search from the Lookup Tree.
Choose the lowest level of Asset Class.
Step 4. To edit the UACS for the Asset coding block, select the coding block, click on the
Elements button. Then select from the dropdown list the applicable values for the
coding blocks. Normally, updating shall be made for the Fund Category, Operating Unit,
Province (for location), Project Title, and Responsibility Center codes. Do the same for the
UACS for the Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Revaluation coding
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Donated Assets are also subject to depreciation based on its remaining useful life, using the
Straight-line Depreciation Method with a 5% salvage value.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 3. Enter the new Asset Transaction information. Fields with an asterisk are mandatory
fields. Populate the required fields.
Step 4. Click on Lookup and find for the Asset Transaction Type. Choose type related to
“Depreciation”.
Step 5. Enter the Accounting Office by click on the Lookup button, click on .
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Maintenance of PPE register will be done through the system providing mandatory information
such as asset ID, asset classification and sub-classification, Asset item group, value of the
asset, asset acquisition methods, depreciation method and period, salvage value, item
operational status, disposal details, etc.
The Asset Item screen contains information regarding the different assets that the
organization may have. Assets are economic resources that are tangible or intangible and are
capable of being owned by the organization. This screen contains different information about
each asset such as Amount, Depreciation, Asset Class, Useful Life, and other pieces of
information. An example of an Asset Item is Motor Vehicle which, like all assets, would be
kept track of in a Balance Sheet by the agency’s accountants.
To modify an Asset item, the designated PSD Creator shall follow the steps below.
Step 1. To update the Asset Item, navigate the Menu ► Property, Plant and Equipment
Management ► Asset Items.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the Goods Receive Note If users
prefer to see a list of all GRN, leave the fields blank.
Step 3. To edit the UACS for the Asset coding block, select the coding block, click on the
Elements button. Then select from the dropdown list the applicable values for the
coding blocks. Normally, updating shall be made for the Fund Category, Operating Unit,
Province (for location), Project Title, and Responsibility Center codes. Do the same for the
UACS for the Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Revaluation coding
blocks. For example:
Asset Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060503000/**
Depreciation Expense Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/5050105003/**
Accumulated Depreciation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060503100/**
Revaluation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/3020101000/**
Step 4. Indicate the date as basis for the start date of depreciation in the “Used From” input
fields.
Note to User: As per GAM Volume 1 Section 27 paragraph c, Depreciation of
an asset begins when it is available for use. The computation shall be for one
month if the PPE is available for use on or before the 15th of the month.
However, if the PPE is available for use after the 15th of the month, depreciation
shall be for the succeeding month. BTMS is configured in this manner.
Step 5. Enter the value of the asset. The salvage value (5% of cost) is automatically computed.
Step 6. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
To handle updating of asset items from GRN with massive data, meaning more than one
quantity with similar catalogue item, economic useful life, asset class, and same UACS coding
blocks, the PSD could manage it by following the steps below:
Step 1. Navigate the Menu ► Property, Plant, and Equipment ► Asset Item.
Step 2. Input the GRN number on the GRN field to display all the Asset Items automatically
created from the GRN approval.
Step 3. Click the Search Button
Step 4. Select all Asset Items.
Step 5. Click the Massive Update button.
Step 6. Select the domain attribute to update. Examples are Asset Coding Block, Expense
Coding Block, Accumulated Depreciation Coding Block, or Revaluation Surplus Coding.
Step 7. Input the UACS then click search to update the Asset Items
Step 8. Click Update.
Step 9. Click the Update Domain button for the Asset coding block massive update.
A notification message will be displayed saying “Selected Domain updated successfully”
Step 10. Verify the updated details on the Asset Items Repeat the steps for the other fields
(meaning other domain attributes).
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
4.8.3.1Disposal by Donation
4.8.3.1.1 Creation of Asset Transaction
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 6. Click on the Asset Transaction tab and then click on the
Lookup button, and enter the Asset Transaction Item information, or leave the Asset
Transaction Item information blank to retrieve all Asset Transaction Items.
Step 7. Click the individual Select Checkbox to select and de-select the Asset Transaction
Items, as required. Then click the Return button.
Step 8. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
4.8.3.2.3 Preparation of RV
RV is the form used to manage receipts. Receipt Management is the process of recording,
classifying and managing revenue collections from different sources. The main function is to
ensure that correct recording and reporting of revenues and other receipts.
Step 10. Click on the ‘Save and Return’ icon to save the RV Item information and
return to the RV screen.
Step 11. Under the Tab click the Edit link.
Step 12. Enter the mandatory fields, denoted by an asterisk (*) to create a new RV Item.
Step 13. Click on the ‘Save and Return’ or Update icon to save the RV Payment
Details information and return to the RV screen.
Step 14. Click on the Save icon at the bottom to save the new RV.
Step 15. Go to Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 16. Click Transition button .
Step 17. Enter Step Note on Transition screen, if needed. Then click on Finish .
4.8.3.2.4 Approval of RV
Once the RV is assigned, the authorized user-approver, usually the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, will get a message about the assignment.
An RRV is a record of a payment made by a customer. The RRV function allows tracking of
items or services for which a customer has paid and applies the amount accordingly. This is
a special function of Cashier or Cash Division personnel as collecting officer.
Step 10. Click the Save and Return icon to save the RRV Item Information and return
to the RRV screen.
Step 11. Click the New icon under the Tab to add
RRV Applied Item.
Step 12. Enter the RRV Applied Item information. Fields with an asterisk ( ) are mandatory
fields.
Step 13. To add the RV on the RRV Applied Item, click on the Lookup button.
Step 14. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV.
Step 15. Select the RV from the list.
Step 16. To add the RV Payment Details, click the Lookup button.
Step 17. Click the Find button to display the list of all RV Payment Details.
Step 18. Select the applicable Voucher payment details from the list.
Step 19. Click the Save and Return icon to save RRV Applied Item information and
return to the RRV Item.
Step 20. Click the Save and Return button to go back to the RRV Screen.
Step 1. Navigate to RRV: Menu ► Receipt Management ► RRV. By default, the RRV screen
will open in Search mode.
Step 2. Enter the information to be used as retrieval criteria in the appropriate field(s). If user
prefers to see a list of all RRVs, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing RRVs will show up that the user is authorized to see. Click on the RRV
that needs to be printed.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the RRV will be displayed. Click on the PDF Form button
to print/view the PO Form.
After the RRV is issued, it is required to be approved, usually by the Chief Accountant or the
equivalent, to automatically record the collection. The assigned approver will get a message
about the assignment. To access it, the user shall take the following steps:
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
Step 7. Click on the Asset Transaction tab and then click on the
Lookup button, and enter the Asset Transaction Item information, or leave the Asset
Transaction Item information blank to retrieve all Asset Transaction Items.
Step 8. Click the individual Select Checkbox to select and de-select the Asset Transaction
Items, as required. Then click the Return button.
Step 9. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on Transition
screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
To account for the asset transfer, the user of the disposing entity shall complete the disposal
transaction following the processes indicated in section 2.2 Asset Transaction, and the user
of the receiving entity shall manually record the acquisition following the processes indicated
in section 2.1 Asset Item / Asset Register.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
The designated PSD Creator shall manually create the Asset Item following the steps below:
Step 1. By default, the Asset Item is in Search Mode. Click on the New button.
Step 2. The Asset item is now on Insert mode. Enter the new Asset Item information.
Fields with an asterisk (*) are mandatory fields.
Step 3. To add an Asset Class, click on the Look up button and search from the Lookup Tree.
Choose the lowest level of Asset Class.
Step 4. To edit the UACS for the Asset coding block, select the coding block, click on the
Elements button. Then select from the dropdown list the applicable values for the
coding blocks. Normally, updating shall be made for the Fund Category, Operating Unit,
Province (for location), Project Title, and Responsibility Center codes. Do the same for the
UACS for the Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Revaluation coding
blocks. For example:
Asset Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601000/**
Depreciation Expense Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/5050106001/**
Accumulated Depreciation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601100/**
Revaluation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/3020101000/**
Step 5. Indicate the date as basis for the start date of depreciation in the “Used From” input
fields.
Note to User: As per GAM Volume 1 Section 27 paragraph c, Depreciation of
an asset begins when it is available for use. The computation shall be for one
month if the PPE is available for use on or before the 15th of the month.
However, if the PPE is available for use after the 15th of the month, depreciation
shall be for the succeeding month. BTMS is configured in this manner.
Step 6. Enter the value of the asset. The salvage value (5% of cost) is automatically computed.
Step 7. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
The designated PSD Creator shall manually create the Asset Item following the steps below:
Step 1. By default, the Asset Item is in Search Mode. Click on the New button.
Step 2. The Asset item is now on Insert mode. Enter the new Asset Item information.
Fields with an asterisk (*) are mandatory fields.
Step 3. To add an Asset Class, click on the Look up button and search from the Lookup Tree.
Choose the lowest level of Asset Class.
Step 4. To edit the UACS for the Asset coding block, select the coding block, click on the
Elements button. Then select from the dropdown list the applicable values for the
coding blocks. Normally, updating shall be made for the Fund Category, Operating Unit,
Province (for location), Project Title, and Responsibility Center codes. Do the same for the
UACS for the Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Revaluation coding
blocks. For example:
Asset Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601000/**
Depreciation Expense Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/5050106001/**
Accumulated Depreciation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601100/**
Revaluation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/3020101000/**
Step 5. Indicate the date as basis for the start date of depreciation in the “Used From” input
fields.
Note to User: As per GAM Volume 1 Section 27 paragraph c, Depreciation of
an asset begins when it is available for use. The computation shall be for one
month if the PPE is available for use on or before the 15th of the month.
However, if the PPE is available for use after the 15th of the month, depreciation
shall be for the succeeding month. BTMS is configured in this manner.
Step 6. Enter the value of the asset. The salvage value (5% of cost) is automatically computed.
Step 7. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
The designated PSD Creator shall manually create the Asset Item following the steps below:
Step 1. By default, the Asset Item is in Search Mode. Click on the New button.
Step 2. The Asset item is now on Insert mode. Enter the new Asset Item information.
Fields with an asterisk (*) are mandatory fields.
Step 3. To add an Asset Class, click on the Look up button and search from the Lookup Tree.
Choose the lowest level of Asset Class.
Step 4. To edit the UACS for the Asset coding block, select the coding block, click on the
Elements button. Then select from the dropdown list the applicable values for the
coding blocks. Normally, updating shall be made for the Fund Category, Operating Unit,
Province (for location), Project Title, and Responsibility Center codes. Do the same for the
UACS for the Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Revaluation coding
blocks. For example:
Asset Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601000/**
Depreciation Expense Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/5050106001/**
Accumulated Depreciation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601100/**
Revaluation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/3020101000/**
Step 5. Indicate the date as basis for the start date of depreciation in the “Used From” input
fields.
Note to User: As per GAM Volume 1 Section 27 paragraph c, Depreciation of
an asset begins when it is available for use. The computation shall be for one
month if the PPE is available for use on or before the 15th of the month.
However, if the PPE is available for use after the 15th of the month, depreciation
shall be for the succeeding month. BTMS is configured in this manner.
Step 6. Enter the value of the asset. The salvage value (5% of cost) is automatically computed.
Step 7. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
The designated PSD Creator shall manually create the Asset Item following the steps below:
Step 1. By default, the Asset Item is in Search Mode. Click on the New button.
Step 2. The Asset item is now on Insert mode. Enter the new Asset Item information.
Fields with an asterisk (*) are mandatory fields.
Step 3. To add an Asset Class, click on the Look up button and search from the Lookup Tree.
Choose the lowest level of Asset Class.
Step 4. To edit the UACS for the Asset coding block, select the coding block, click on the
Elements button. Then select from the dropdown list the applicable values for the
coding blocks. Normally, updating shall be made for the Fund Category, Operating Unit,
Province (for location), Project Title, and Responsibility Center codes. Do the same for the
UACS for the Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Revaluation coding
blocks. For example:
Asset Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601000/**
Depreciation Expense Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/5050106001/**
Accumulated Depreciation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/1060601100/**
Revaluation Coding Block:
01101101/060010100000/1339/06001000000000000000/3020101000/**
Step 5. Indicate the date as basis for the start date of depreciation in the “Used From” input
fields.
Note to User: As per GAM Volume 1 Section 27 paragraph c, Depreciation of
an asset begins when it is available for use. The computation shall be for one
month if the PPE is available for use on or before the 15th of the month.
However, if the PPE is available for use after the 15th of the month, depreciation
shall be for the succeeding month. BTMS is configured in this manner.
Step 6. Enter the value of the asset. The salvage value (5% of cost) is automatically computed.
Step 7. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the Asset Transaction to save your
new Asset Transaction information. A window will appear to confirm.
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
To create the Asset Transaction for this, the Creator should take the following steps:
The transaction will be routed to the PSD Head for first-line approval and the Accounting
Division Chief for final approval. Once the document/form is assigned, the authorized user-
approver will get a message about the assignment. This would also appear as Pending Task
in the Dashboard, when the button is activated. The Approver shall then take the
following steps:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the
message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective Journal
Entry Voucher for review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select the appropriate transition from
the dropdown list.
Note to the User: Each level of Approver has two options:
1. Approved, if form and substance are correct and good to go.
2. Back to Creator for Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance
require correction, modification, or order to cancel the transaction.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note on
Transition screen, if necessary or when modifications or corrections are required.
Step 1. Navigate to Menu > Property Plant and Equipment Management > Custody
Transactions.
Step 2. Click the Search button.
Step 3. Click the individual Select Checkbox to select the Asset Item for modification.
Step 4. Modify the Asset Item as required.
Step 5. Click on the Update button at the bottom of the screen to save users
modifications.
Step 6. A window appears to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Step 1. Once the Custody Transaction for approval is assigned the Asset Office User will get
a notification. Click the notification on the Internal Messages displayed on the upper right side
of the screen.
Step 2. Click on the Unread Status of the message to display the details of the custody
Transaction for review.
Step 3. Click on the Update Domain button to go to that particular Custody Transaction
screen.
Step 4. Check and verify the completeness of the transaction. Go to the Transition dropdown
list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 5. Click the Transition Button to add comments on the step note. Then click
finish to submit. The user will then receive a confirmation message that the transition
is executed successfully.
Step 2. Click on the Find button to display the list of all Custody Transaction then
select the item for transition or input the Custody Transaction code then click the Find
button.
Step 3. Go to Transition dropdown list and select the appropriate transition.
Step 4. Click the Transition Button to add comments on the step note. Then click
finish to submit.
Step 5. The user will then receive a confirmation message that the transition is executed
successfully. Confirmation box will pop up to confirm the execution of the transition.
Step 3. Click the individual Select Checkbox, under to select and de-select the Asset
Items in Count (s), as required, or click the Select All button or Unselect All
button, to select or de-select all Asset Items in Count, if required.
Step 4. Click the Remove button to remove the selected Asset Items in Count, if
required
Step 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all required Asset Items in Count.
Step 1. By default, you will be in Search Mode. Enter the information to be used as
retrieval criteria in the appropriate field/s. If you prefer to see the list of all Asset Count
Requests, leave all fields blank.
Step 2. Click on the Search button. The list of Asset Count Requests meeting
the retrieval criteria will appear.
Step 3. Click on the Asset Count Request you want to modify. You will then be in
Update/Delete Mode.
Step 4. Make the necessary modification(s).
Step 5. Click on the Update button at the bottom of the screen to save your
modifications.
Step 6. A window will appear to confirm the modification. Click OK to confirm.
Adding bank accounting information of every vendor or payee shall follow the steps below:
Copying of Forms
For similar transactions, copying prepopulated forms is one best option.
Step 7. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more debit
accounts.
Step 8. Click on the New icon under the Tab to enter the credit account.
Step 9. At the Journal Entry Voucher Item, choose the correct UACS Coding Block.
Step 10. Fill out the credit amount field.
Step 11. Click on the Save and Return icon at the bottom. Do the same for more credit
accounts.
Step 12. Select the Not Posted Reason from the list.
Step 13. Click on the Temp Save button.
Generation of Forms
Users, especially the Creators, have the option to generate forms every transition level. But it
is highly recommended to produce PR, PO, ObR, GRN, DV, and JEV at the finally approved
stage.
prefers to see a list of all Obligation Request, leave all fields blank.
Step 3. Click on the Find button.
Step 4. List of existing Obligation Requests will show up that the user is authorized to see.
Click on the Obligation that need to print.
Step 5. Once selected, details of the ObR will be displayed in View Mode. Click on the PDF
Form button at the top buttons panel to print/view the Obligation Request Form.
4.9.5.1Approver
The Approver shall follow the steps below:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective form for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select Back to Creator for
Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance require correction or modification.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note describing
the modifications or corrections required on Transition screen.
4.9.5.2Creator
The Creator shall follow the steps below:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective form for
correction and further action.
Step 4. After the necessary correction or modification, go up to Transition field, and select
Approval Requested.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note describing
the modifications or corrections made on Transition screen.
4.9.6.1Approver
The Approver shall follow the steps below:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective form for
review and further action.
Step 4. After the review, go up to Transition field, and select Back to Creator for
Modification/Cancellation, if form and substance require cancellation.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction. Enter a Step Note instructing
the cancellation on Transition screen.
4.9.6.2Creator
The Creator shall follow the steps below:
Step 1. Click on Internal message to open and view the message or list of messages.
Step 2. Click on the Status button against the message to view the details of the message.
Step 3. Click on Update Domain button. The system will open the respective form for
further action.
Step 4. Go up to Transition field, and select Cancelled.
Step 5. Click Transition button to finish the transaction.
5 FAQS
The following contains the library of frequently asked questions and the corresponding readily
available answers:
What if my supposed pending task/s does not show either in my internal messages
or dashboard?
In cases where pending task is not appearing in the User Dashboard or the Internal
Messages, the User shall utilize other means such as the Search, Lookup and Find modes
in the corresponding transaction screens. Navigate the menu to the specified form you are
looking for. Enter the specific transaction ID number, if known, or click the Find button
to display the list of all related forms.
Always remember to write down the transaction ID number when successfully saved and
transitioned.
It is the Budget Division that manages the registries of appropriation, allotment, allocation
and obligation. The user should contact this office to help determine the correct Fund
Source codes or proper charging of commitments or obligations. Such action is vital for all
Requesting Units (RUs) to complete the Obligation Request (OBR) documents, including
Purchase Request (PR) and Purchase Order (PO).
It is the Accounting Division that handles the proper recording of financial transactions.
User should contact them to help determine the correct Object codes or proper accounting
classifications. It is also the Accounting Division who got the copy of the Notice of Cash
Allocation. Such action is vital for all RUs to complete the Disbursement Voucher (DV)
document.
Customers or Payers.
In cases where the User could not find a particular support entity, say a Payee who is an
Employee, he/she shall contact their respective System Administrator to add the name/s
in the database. Be reminded that all Vendors must be registered with the PhilGEPS in
order to be added to the system database.
Then contact the BTMS Helpdesk for any system issues, like “errors in the workflow”,
“blocked” accounts, inability to save document, etc.
Accounts Payable or other related liability account is the GL offset code for the DV, unless
the DV is prepaid. Once the DV is approved by the Chief Accountant, the automatic Journal
Entry Voucher (JEV) would indicate a credit to Accounts Payable. Accounts Receivable or
other related account is the GL offset code for the RV. Upon approval of the RV, the
automatic JEV would reflect the said account as debit entry. Similarly, the Treasury Bank
Accounts will be indicated as the offset codes for Payment Orders and RRVs.
How do I determine that the chosen UACS coding block has budget allocations?
The PR will be saved and approved once the chosen UACS coding block has budget
allocations. To view the Budget Control of the selected coding block, go back to the PR
Item tab and click the Roll up Budget Information button.
What if the unit prices in POs are different from PR's unit prices?
The unit prices in the POs shall prevail. PR unit prices are as good as estimates for
commitment in which total approved amount sets the maximum limit for the actual PO of
the same goods, property or service. In the preparation of PO, change the amounts based
on PO’s unit prices; the total amount should be less than or equal to the approved PR. The
approved PO amounts will be taken up as total obligations.
In cases where PO unit prices exceed the PR’s unit prices, the Creator shall request the
PR approver to cancel the PR and then prepare a new PR with the new unit prices. When
selected PR items have price changes, a PO can be created for those items in which unit
prices are less than or equal to the committed prices. Then a new PR will be prepared for
items with new and higher prices. Once the POs are prepared and approved, the PR
approver shall then close the previous PR with remaining items.
What should I do if either PR, PO or ObR have been transitioned but needs to be
modified?
The head of the RUs, or any assigned approver, needs to send back the created PR/PO
or OBR to its creator. The concerned user or Creator should either call the Approver using
office phones or message him/her through the Internal Messaging features of BTMS to
notify him/her about the need to send it back.
5.3 Payment
Will the GRN replace Inspection and Acceptance Report (IAR)?
No, IAR will be a supporting document to the GRNs and will eventually be the basis for
paying the supplier or vendor. GRN is a document prepared through the system by a
designated staff while the IAR is a prescribed document used to inspect and accept
purchased goods and services which is prepared and signed by an Inspectorate team.
If the disbursement is correct, the Accounting Division Chief will give the approval and will
submit it for payment approval by the Head of the Agency. This transition will automatically
create the Journal Entry Voucher (JEV) to record the payment transaction in GL.
How can I view and generate the JEV automatically created when DV is approved?
Step 1. Navigate the Menu ► Payment Management ► Disbursement Voucher.
Step 2. Enter the information, the DV Number if known, to be used as retrieval criteria in
the appropriate field(s).
Step 3. If user prefers to see a list of all DVs, leave all fields blank. Click on the Find
button.
Step 4. Click on the reference DV from the list of existing DVs that the user is authorized
to see.
Step 5. Scroll down to the mid-section of the approved DV form marked Journal Entry
Voucher.
Step 6. Click the lookup button to view the auto-generated JEV.
Step 7. Click on Generate Report as PDF.
How can I view and generate the JEV automatically created for Capital Asset-related
disbursements?
Step 1. At the screen view of the first JEV automatically created after the approval of DV,
scroll down and look for the “Assets-Liabilities Journal Voucher”. This contains the
mapping of Capital Expenditures to the Accrual accounts for the respective assets
purchased.
Step 2. Click the Details button available on the side to view the second JEV automatically
created after the approval of DV.
Step 3. Scroll down below to view the Journal Entry in full UACS Coding Block.
Step 4. Click on Generate Report as PDF.
What are the possible reasons my DVs are not appearing in the list for generation?
Only approved DVs by the Final Approver would appear in the list of DV for Payment
Extracts generation. So, if the DV/s you are looking for is missing from the list, it could be
that:
o DVs are dated with later due dates which are not covered in the range of dates
you indicated in the filter or criteria; or,
o DVs are still in the process of approval and have not yet approved for payment by
the Final Approver; or,
o DVs are sent back by any approver for correction, modification, updating or
cancellation, or entirely rejected by the Final Approver.
5.4 Collection
How is Treasury Bank Account relevant to RV creation?
Treasury Bank Account is a Government’s Bank Account where the payment gets
deposited. Only Bank Accounts (linked to the selected treasury bank account) having the
same currency as the voucher is allowed.